EP2145772A2 - Method of manufacturing aluminum alloy plate for lithographic printing plate, aluminum alloy plate for lithographic printing plate, lithographic printing plate support and presensitized plate - Google Patents

Method of manufacturing aluminum alloy plate for lithographic printing plate, aluminum alloy plate for lithographic printing plate, lithographic printing plate support and presensitized plate Download PDF

Info

Publication number
EP2145772A2
EP2145772A2 EP09165524A EP09165524A EP2145772A2 EP 2145772 A2 EP2145772 A2 EP 2145772A2 EP 09165524 A EP09165524 A EP 09165524A EP 09165524 A EP09165524 A EP 09165524A EP 2145772 A2 EP2145772 A2 EP 2145772A2
Authority
EP
European Patent Office
Prior art keywords
plate
aluminum alloy
treatment
lithographic printing
aluminum
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Withdrawn
Application number
EP09165524A
Other languages
German (de)
French (fr)
Other versions
EP2145772A3 (en
Inventor
Hirokazu Sawada
Shinya Kurokawa
Akio Uesugi
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Fujifilm Corp
Original Assignee
Fujifilm Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Fujifilm Corp filed Critical Fujifilm Corp
Publication of EP2145772A2 publication Critical patent/EP2145772A2/en
Publication of EP2145772A3 publication Critical patent/EP2145772A3/en
Withdrawn legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41NPRINTING PLATES OR FOILS; MATERIALS FOR SURFACES USED IN PRINTING MACHINES FOR PRINTING, INKING, DAMPING, OR THE LIKE; PREPARING SUCH SURFACES FOR USE AND CONSERVING THEM
    • B41N1/00Printing plates or foils; Materials therefor
    • B41N1/04Printing plates or foils; Materials therefor metallic
    • B41N1/08Printing plates or foils; Materials therefor metallic for lithographic printing
    • B41N1/083Printing plates or foils; Materials therefor metallic for lithographic printing made of aluminium or aluminium alloys or having such surface layers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C22METALLURGY; FERROUS OR NON-FERROUS ALLOYS; TREATMENT OF ALLOYS OR NON-FERROUS METALS
    • C22BPRODUCTION AND REFINING OF METALS; PRETREATMENT OF RAW MATERIALS
    • C22B21/00Obtaining aluminium
    • C22B21/06Obtaining aluminium refining
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C22METALLURGY; FERROUS OR NON-FERROUS ALLOYS; TREATMENT OF ALLOYS OR NON-FERROUS METALS
    • C22CALLOYS
    • C22C1/00Making non-ferrous alloys
    • C22C1/02Making non-ferrous alloys by melting
    • C22C1/026Alloys based on aluminium
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C22METALLURGY; FERROUS OR NON-FERROUS ALLOYS; TREATMENT OF ALLOYS OR NON-FERROUS METALS
    • C22CALLOYS
    • C22C21/00Alloys based on aluminium
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C22METALLURGY; FERROUS OR NON-FERROUS ALLOYS; TREATMENT OF ALLOYS OR NON-FERROUS METALS
    • C22FCHANGING THE PHYSICAL STRUCTURE OF NON-FERROUS METALS AND NON-FERROUS ALLOYS
    • C22F1/00Changing the physical structure of non-ferrous metals or alloys by heat treatment or by hot or cold working
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C22METALLURGY; FERROUS OR NON-FERROUS ALLOYS; TREATMENT OF ALLOYS OR NON-FERROUS METALS
    • C22FCHANGING THE PHYSICAL STRUCTURE OF NON-FERROUS METALS AND NON-FERROUS ALLOYS
    • C22F1/00Changing the physical structure of non-ferrous metals or alloys by heat treatment or by hot or cold working
    • C22F1/04Changing the physical structure of non-ferrous metals or alloys by heat treatment or by hot or cold working of aluminium or alloys based thereon
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C1/00Forme preparation
    • B41C1/10Forme preparation for lithographic printing; Master sheets for transferring a lithographic image to the forme
    • B41C1/1008Forme preparation for lithographic printing; Master sheets for transferring a lithographic image to the forme by removal or destruction of lithographic material on the lithographic support, e.g. by laser or spark ablation; by the use of materials rendered soluble or insoluble by heat exposure, e.g. by heat produced from a light to heat transforming system; by on-the-press exposure or on-the-press development, e.g. by the fountain of photolithographic materials
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C1/00Forme preparation
    • B41C1/10Forme preparation for lithographic printing; Master sheets for transferring a lithographic image to the forme
    • B41C1/1008Forme preparation for lithographic printing; Master sheets for transferring a lithographic image to the forme by removal or destruction of lithographic material on the lithographic support, e.g. by laser or spark ablation; by the use of materials rendered soluble or insoluble by heat exposure, e.g. by heat produced from a light to heat transforming system; by on-the-press exposure or on-the-press development, e.g. by the fountain of photolithographic materials
    • B41C1/1016Forme preparation for lithographic printing; Master sheets for transferring a lithographic image to the forme by removal or destruction of lithographic material on the lithographic support, e.g. by laser or spark ablation; by the use of materials rendered soluble or insoluble by heat exposure, e.g. by heat produced from a light to heat transforming system; by on-the-press exposure or on-the-press development, e.g. by the fountain of photolithographic materials characterised by structural details, e.g. protective layers, backcoat layers or several imaging layers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2201/00Location, type or constituents of the non-imaging layers in lithographic printing formes
    • B41C2201/02Cover layers; Protective layers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2201/00Location, type or constituents of the non-imaging layers in lithographic printing formes
    • B41C2201/04Intermediate layers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2201/00Location, type or constituents of the non-imaging layers in lithographic printing formes
    • B41C2201/10Location, type or constituents of the non-imaging layers in lithographic printing formes characterised by inorganic compounds, e.g. pigments
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2201/00Location, type or constituents of the non-imaging layers in lithographic printing formes
    • B41C2201/12Location, type or constituents of the non-imaging layers in lithographic printing formes characterised by non-macromolecular organic compounds
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2201/00Location, type or constituents of the non-imaging layers in lithographic printing formes
    • B41C2201/14Location, type or constituents of the non-imaging layers in lithographic printing formes characterised by macromolecular organic compounds, e.g. binder, adhesives
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2210/00Preparation or type or constituents of the imaging layers, in relation to lithographic printing forme preparation
    • B41C2210/04Negative working, i.e. the non-exposed (non-imaged) areas are removed
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2210/00Preparation or type or constituents of the imaging layers, in relation to lithographic printing forme preparation
    • B41C2210/08Developable by water or the fountain solution
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2210/00Preparation or type or constituents of the imaging layers, in relation to lithographic printing forme preparation
    • B41C2210/20Preparation or type or constituents of the imaging layers, in relation to lithographic printing forme preparation characterised by inorganic additives, e.g. pigments, salts
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2210/00Preparation or type or constituents of the imaging layers, in relation to lithographic printing forme preparation
    • B41C2210/22Preparation or type or constituents of the imaging layers, in relation to lithographic printing forme preparation characterised by organic non-macromolecular additives, e.g. dyes, UV-absorbers, plasticisers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41CPROCESSES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OR REPRODUCTION OF PRINTING SURFACES
    • B41C2210/00Preparation or type or constituents of the imaging layers, in relation to lithographic printing forme preparation
    • B41C2210/24Preparation or type or constituents of the imaging layers, in relation to lithographic printing forme preparation characterised by a macromolecular compound or binder obtained by reactions involving carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds, e.g. acrylics, vinyl polymers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41NPRINTING PLATES OR FOILS; MATERIALS FOR SURFACES USED IN PRINTING MACHINES FOR PRINTING, INKING, DAMPING, OR THE LIKE; PREPARING SUCH SURFACES FOR USE AND CONSERVING THEM
    • B41N3/00Preparing for use and conserving printing surfaces
    • B41N3/03Chemical or electrical pretreatment
    • B41N3/038Treatment with a chromium compound, a silicon compound, a phophorus compound or a compound of a metal of group IVB; Hydrophilic coatings obtained by hydrolysis of organometallic compounds

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate and its manufacturing method, as well as a lithographic printing plate support and a presensitized plate using the same.
  • CTP computer-to-plate
  • One of the methods for eliminating a treatment step is a method called "on-machine development" in which an exposed presensitized plate is mounted on a plate cylinder of a printing press and fountain solution and ink are supplied as the plate cylinder is rotated to thereby remove non-image areas of the presensitized plate.
  • this is a system in which the presensitized plate following exposure is mounted on the printing press without any further treatment so that development completes in the usual printing process.
  • the presensitized plate suitable for use in such on-machine development is required to have an image recording layer which is soluble in fountain solution or an ink solvent and to have a light-room handling property capable of development on a printing press placed in a light room.
  • JP 2938397 B describes a presensitized plate having a hydrophilic support provided thereon a photosensitive layer containing fine particles of a thermoplastic hydrophobic polymer dispersed in a hydrophilic binder polymer.
  • JP 2938397 B describes that the plate can be mounted on a plate cylinder of a printing press to remove unexposed areas using fountain solution and/or ink (on-machine development can be made) after an image has been formed by exposing the presensitized plate with a laser beam to coalesce together the thermoplastic hydrophobic polymer particles in the image recording layer by heat.
  • the presensitized plate is photosensitive to the infrared region and therefore also has a light-room handling property.
  • JP 2001-293971 A describes that a presensitized plate having an image recording layer which contains a thermoplastic particulate polymer and at least one of a particulate polymer having a heat-reactive group and a microcapsule containing a compound having a heat-reactive group has a good on-machine developability, a high sensitivity and a long press life.
  • the inventors of the invention have made an intensive study on why such spotting occurred and focused attention on the fact that the image recording layer provided in the so-called on-machine development type presensitized plates described in JP 2338397 B and JP 2001-293971 A can be removed by printing ink and/or fountain solution and therefore contains a large amount of hydrophilic components, as a result of which the image recording layer is likely to be receptive to moisture under the influence of ambient air.
  • the image recording layer contains moisture under the influence of ambient air and also hydrophilic components anionized by the moisture (hereinafter preferred to simply as "anions”) to cause corrosion and therefore spotting on an aluminum alloy plate.
  • the inventors also revealed that, of those anions, presence of anions comprising halide ions and/or PF 6 - is prone to cause corrosion of the aluminum alloy plate,
  • JP 7-81260 A proposes a lithographic printing plate support manufacturing method which involves melting an aluminum material containing at least 99.7% of aluminum to prepare an ingot, scalping the ingot, subjecting the scalped ingot to cold rolling to reduce the thickness to 0.5 to 0.1 mm, correcting the rolled plate to obtain an aluminium support, and graining the aluminum support.
  • JP 8-209313 A proposes a method of manufacturing an aluminum alloy plate support for a lithographic printing plate characterized in that an aluminum alloy melt containing 0.05 to 1,0 wt% of iron, up to 1.0 wt% of silicon, and up to 0.2 wt% of cupper, with the balance being aluminum and inadvertent impurities is continuously cast and rolled to obtain a strip-shaped cast plate with a thickness of 25 mm or less, which is then subjected to at least one cold rolling treatment to obtain a rolled plate having a desired thickness with the final cold rolling treatment being carried out at a draft of at least 30%, and in the cold rolling process is carried out at least one annealing treatment that involves heating the rolled plate to a temperature range of 350 to 620°C at a temperature rise rate of at least 50°C/min, maintaining it in the temperature range for not more than 10 minutes, and cooling it to a temperature range of 150°C or less at a temperature falling rate of at least 50°C/min.
  • a first object of the invention is to provide an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate capable of obtaining a lithographic printing plate having an excellent resistance to spotting.
  • a second object of the invention is to provide a method of manufacturing such aluminum alloy plate.
  • a third object of the invention is to provide a lithographic printing plate support obtained by using such aluminum alloy plate.
  • a fourth object of the invention is to provide a presensitized plate and in particular an on-machine developable presensitized plate obtained by using such lithographic printing plate support.
  • a lithographic printing plate having an excellent resistance to spotting can be obtained by using an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate which is obtained by carrying out semicontinuous casting for forming an ingot in which iron is incorporated in an amount of not more than a specified value and cold rolling at a total draft exceeding a specified value.
  • the invention has been completed based on this finding.
  • the invention provides the following (1) to (8).
  • the invention can provide an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate capable of obtaining a lithographic printing plate having an excellent resistance to spotting, a method of manufacturing such aluminum alloy plate, a lithographic printing plate support obtained by using such aluminum alloy plate, as well as a presensitized plate and in particular an on-machine developable presensitized pilate obtained by using such lithographic printing plate support.
  • the invention can provide a lithographic printing plate having an excellent resistance to spotting irrespective of the anion concentration (halide ion concentration, PF 6 - concentration) of the image recording layer and is therefore useful.
  • An aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate obtained by the method of manufacturing an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate of the invention to be described latter (hereinafter also referred to as the "aluminum alloy plate manufacturing method of the invention") is used for the lithographic printing plate support of the invention.
  • the resulting aluminum alloy plate is hereinafter referred to as the "aluminum alloy plate of the invention”.
  • the aluminum alloy plate manufacturing method of the invention is a manufacturing method which includes a semicontinuous casting step in which an ingot with an iron content of up to 0.15 wt% is formed from an aluminum alloy melt; a scalping step in which the ingot formed in the semicontinuous casting step is rendered into a plate form by scalping; a hot rolling step in which the ingot in the plate form following the scalping step is rolled to obtain a rolled plate; and a cold rolling step in which the rolled plate following the hot rolling step is subjected to cold rolling at a total draft exceeding 88% to obtain an aluminum alloy plate with a thickness of 0.1 nm or more.
  • an aluminum alloy melt that has been adjusted to a given alloying ingredient content can be optionally subjected to cleaning treatment by an ordinary method.
  • Cleaning treatment is carried out, for example, by degassing treatment for removing hydrogen and other unwanted gases from the melt (e.g., flux treatment using argon gas, chlorine gas or the like); filtering treatment using, for example, what is referred to as a rigid media filter (e.g., ceramic tube filter, ceramic foam filter), a filter that employs alumina flakes, alumina balls or the like as the filter medium, or a glass cloth filter; or a combination of degassing treatment and filtering treatment.
  • a rigid media filter e.g., ceramic tube filter, ceramic foam filter
  • a filter that employs alumina flakes, alumina balls or the like as the filter medium, or a glass cloth filter e.g., a glass cloth filter
  • an aluminum material whose iron content is lower than the aluminum material with an aluminum purity of at least 99.7% (grade: P1020 containing such impurities as 0.18 wt% of iron, 0.06 wt% of silicon, 0.005 wt% of titanium, 0.012 wt% of gallium 0.006 wt% of vanadium, and 0.003 wt% of copper) and melting the thus selected aluminum material, because the iron content of the ingot to be formed in the semicontinuous casting step to be described later and that of the aluminum alloy plate of the invention are adjusted to 0.15 wt% or less.
  • the content of the remaining melt is preferable for at least 50 wt% of an aluminum material with an iron content of 0.08% or less to be added to the aluminum melt in the melting furnace (remaining melt) and melted.
  • the content of the remaining melt it is more preferable for the content of the remaining melt to be from 10 to 50 wt% and even more preferably from 10 to 20 wt%.
  • the remaining melt in the melting furnace preferably contains less than 0.5% of iron for the reason that the iron content of the ingot to be formed in the semicontinuous casting step to be described later is readily adjusted to 0.15 wt% or less.
  • a commercial product with an aluminum purity of at least 99.85% (grade: P0608 containing such impurities as 0.07 wt% of iron, 0.03 wt% of silicon, 0.003 wt% of titanium and approximately 0 wt% of copper) may be used for such aluminum material with an iron content of 0.08% or less.
  • the aluminum alloy melt is preferably obtained by melting an aluminum material with an aluminum purity of 99.99% containing such impurities as 0.003 wt% of iron, 0.001 wt% of silicon, 0.000 wt% of titanium, and 0.001 wt% of copper.
  • the semicontinuous casting step is a step in which an ingot containing up to 0.15 wt% of iron is formed from the aluminum alloy melt having undergone the above-described cleaning treatment as desired.
  • any of the various aluminum alloy melts illustrated above may be subjected to semicontinuous casting to form an ingot with an iron content of up to 0.15 wt%.
  • a stationary mold may be used to prepare an ingot having a desired plate thickness (e.g., 300 to 800 mm).
  • the iron content of the resulting aluminum alloy plate of the invention is also adjusted to 0.15 wt% or less, thus enabling a lithographic printing plate with an excellent resistance to spotting to be obtained.
  • the scalping step is a step in which the ingot formed in the semicontinuous casting step is rendered into a plate form by scalping.
  • a nonuniform portion can be removed from the surface layer to obtain an aluminum alloy plate with a desired plate thickness by scalping, for example, a 1 to 30 mm thick portion and preferably 1 to 10 mm thick portion of the surface layer of the ingot by an ordinary method.
  • the aluminum alloy plate obtained by the scalping step is preferably heated in a heating furnace to a hot rolling starting temperature or higher before being subjected to the hot rolling step to be described later.
  • Soaking treatment is preferably carried out at a temperature at which iron-containing intermetallic compounds are not transferred to the stable phase.
  • the iron-containing intermetallic compounds which may cause corrosion have a metastable phase, whereby the presensitized plate of the invention obtained by using the resulting aluminum alloy plate of the invention has an improved resistance to spotting.
  • a temperature known in a literature may be applied as the temperature at which the intermetallic compounds are not transferred to the stable phase, but to be more specific the temperature is preferably in a range of less than 550°C, more preferably 500 to 540°C, and even more preferably 510 to 540°C.
  • Soaking treatment is preferably carried out for up to 30 hours in terms of further reducing transition of the iron-containing intermetallic compounds to the stable phase, and for at least 1 hour in terms of making the temperature of the whole slab uniform.
  • ⁇ -AlFeSi, ⁇ -AlFeSi and Al 6 Fe are iron-containing metastable intermetallic compounds known in literatures.
  • Al 3 Fe is a stable intermetallic compound.
  • ⁇ -AlFeSi, ⁇ -AlFeSi and Al 6 Fe are desirable iron-containing intermetallic compounds, whereas Al 3 Fe is not desirable.
  • the hot rolling step is a step in which the ingot in the plate form as obtained by the scalping step is rolled to obtain a rolled plate with a reduced plate thickness, with the soaking treatment being optionally carried out between the scalping step and the hot rolling step.
  • the aluminum alloy plate is preferably rolled to a plate thickness of not more than 10 mm, more preferably from 2.6 to 7.0 mm and even more preferably from 3.0 to 5.0 mm.
  • the iron content is as low as 0.15 wt% or less, it is particularly preferable for hot rolling treatment to be followed by self-recrystallization instead of annealing to be described later in order to minimize reduction of the mechanical strength (in particular tensile strength) of the resulting aluminum alloy plate.
  • the temperature at the end of hot rolling is preferably equal to or higher than the recrystallization temperature (270°C) and more preferably equal to or higher than 290°C.
  • the temperature at the end of hot rolling is preferably up to 350°C and more preferably up to 340°C.
  • annealing may be carried out before or after cold rolling, or even during cold rolling to be described later, but as described above, the plate following the hot rolling step is preferably self-recrystallized instead of annealing.
  • the annealing conditions may consist of 2 to 20 hours of heating at 280 to 600°C, and preferably 2 to 10 hours of heating at 350 to 500°C, in a batch-type annealing furnace, or of continuously heating for several tens of seconds to several minutes at 450°C or more, in a continuous annealing furnace.
  • the cold rolling step is a step in which the rolled plate following the hot rolling step is subjected to cold rolling at a total draft exceeding 88% to obtain an aluminum alloy plate with a thickness of at least 0.1 mm.
  • the above-described cold rolling enables a lithographic printing plate with an excellent resistance to spotting to be obtained while ensuring the mechanical strength of the resulting aluminum alloy plate of the invention.
  • the iron content of the resulting aluminum alloy plate of the invention is adjusted to 0.15 wt% or less so that a lithographic printing plate with an excellent resistance to spotting can be obtained.
  • the mechanical strength usually decreases at a lower iron content but it is considered that the mechanical strength can be maintained by setting the total draft in the cold rolling step to a higher value even at such a low iron content.
  • the total draft is preferably at least 90% in order to ensure the mechanical strength of the resulting aluminum alloy plate of the invention.
  • the above-defined range is desirable particularly in cases where no annealing is carried out, because the mechanical strength is readily ensured.
  • the upper limit of the total draft in cold rolling is preferably 95% because crystal grains are excessively extended to lower the surface quality due to the crystal grains in the surface roughening treatment to be described later.
  • the aluminum alloy plate of the invention is an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate as obtained by the above-described aluminum alloy plate manufacturing method of the invention.
  • a lithographic printing plate having an excellent resistance to spotting can be obtained by using the aluminum alloy plate of the invention because the aluminum alloy plate of the invention contains up to 0.15 wt% of iron as in the ingot formed by the semicontinuous casting step.
  • Silicon is in the state of solid solution in aluminum or is present in the form of deposits of an aluminum-iron-silicon intermetallic compound or elemental silicon.
  • the silicon in the state of solid solution in aluminum has the effect of making the electrochemically grained surface uniform and the effect of mainly making the pits formed by electrochemical graining treatment deep and uniform.
  • Silicon is an element which is contained as an inadvertent impurity in the aluminum starting material. A very small amount of silicon is often intentionally added to prevent variations due to smarting material differences. The silicon content of less than 0.05 wt% is not practical, because the above-described effect5 are not achieved and a high-purity aluminum material which is expensive is required. A silicon content exceeding 0.20 wt% causes an inconvenience such as poor resistance to spotting when printing is carried out. On the other hand, in some cases, the starting material may already contain at least 0.03 wt% of silicon and a numeric value of less than 0.03 wt% is therefore not practical.
  • the silicon content is from 0.05 to 0.20 wt%.
  • the silicon content falls within the above-defined range, the uniformity of electrochemical graining treatment to be described later is not impaired and a lithographic printing plate obtained by using the inventive aluminum alloy plate obtained has an excellent resistance to spotting.
  • Zinc has the effect of reducing the diameter of the pits formed by electrochemical graining treatment and can be therefore added to design a desired pit shape. Addition of a large amount of zinc enables the pit diameter to be reduced.
  • the zinc content is preferably not more than 0.01 wt%.
  • Magnesium has the effect of refining the recrystallized aluminum structure and the effect of improving the tensile strength, proof stress, fatigue strength, bending strength, thermosoftening resistance and other mechanical strength.
  • magnesium when added in an appropriate amount, magnesium also has the effect of uniformly dispersing the pits during electrolytic graining treatment.
  • the magnesium content is preferably not more than 0.20 wt%.
  • Copper is an element which comparatively readily enters into solid solution in aluminum and greatly influences the electrochemical graining properties on a lithographic printing plate support.
  • copper may be appropriately contained in an amount of 0.001 to 0.040 wt%.
  • the aluminum alloy plate contains aluminum and inadvertent impurities as the balance.
  • inadvertent impurities examples include magnesium, chromium, zinc, vanadium, and beryllium. These may be contained in amounts of not more than 0.05 wt%, respectively.
  • inadvertent impurities will originate from the aluminum material. If the inadvertent impurities are what is present in a material having an aluminum purity of 99.5 wt%, they will not compromise the intended effects of the invention.
  • the inadvertent impurities may be, for example, impurities included in the amounts mentioned in Aluminum Alloys: Structure and Properties, by L.F. Mondolfo (1976 ).
  • the lithographic printing plate support of the invention is obtained by subjecting the surface of the aluminum alloy plate to the surface roughening treatment including electrochemical graining treatment.
  • the surface roughening treatment may include solely electrochemical graining treatment, or electrochemical graining treatment, mechanical graining treatment and/or chemical graining treatment in combination.
  • mechanical graining treatment is preferably followed by electrochemical graining treatment.
  • electrochemical graining treatment is preferably carried out in an aqueous solution of nitric acid or hydrochloric acid.
  • the surface of the aluminum alloy plate may generally have a surface roughness R a of 0.35 to 1.0 ⁇ m.
  • mechanical graining treatment is not particularly limited for its conditions and can be carried out according to the method described in JP 50-40047 B .
  • Mechanical graining treatment can be carried out by brush graining using a suspension of pumice or a transfer system.
  • Chemical graining treatment is also not particularly limited but may be carried out by any known method.
  • Mechanical graining treatment is preferably followed by chemical etching treatment described below.
  • chemical etching treatment following mechanical graining treatment is to smooth edges of irregularities at the surface of the aluminum alloy plate to prevent ink from catching on the edges during printing, to improve the scumming resistance of the lithographic printing plate, and to remove abrasive particles or other unnecessary substances remaining on the surface.
  • etching processes including etching using an acid and etching using an alkali are known in the art, and an exemplary method which is particularly excellent in terms of etching efficiency includes chemical etching treatment using an aqueous alkali solution. This treatment is hereinafter referred to as "alkali etching treatment.”
  • Alkaline agents that may be used in the alkali solution are not particularly limited and illustrative examples of suitable alkaline agents include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium metasilicate, sodium carbonate, sodium aluminate, and sodium gluconate.
  • the alkaline agents may contain aluminum ions.
  • the alkali solution has a concentration of preferably at least 0.01 wt% and more preferably at least 3 wt%, but preferably not more than 30 wt% and more preferably not more than 25 wt%.
  • the alkali solution has a temperature of preferably room temperature or higher, and more preferable at least 30°C, but preferably not more than 80°C, and more preferably not more than 75°C,
  • the amount of material removed from the aluminum alloy plate (also referred to below as the "etching amount”) is preferably at least 0.1 g/m 2 and more preferable at least 1 g/m 2 , but preferably not more than 20 g/m 2 and more preferably not more than 10 g/m 2 .
  • the treatment time is preferably from 2 seconds to 5 minutes depending on the etching amount and more preferably from 2 to 10 seconds in terms of improving the productivity.
  • chemical etching treatment using an acid solution at a low temperature is preferably carried out to remove substances produced by alkali etching treatment.
  • Acids that may be used in the acid solution are not particularly limited and illustrative examples thereof include sulfuric acid, nitric acid and hydrochloric acid.
  • the acid solution preferably has a concentration of 1 to 50 wt%.
  • the acidic solution preferably has a temperature of 20 to 80°C. When the concentration, and temperature of the acid solution fall within the above-defined ranges, a lithographic printing plate obtained by using the inventive lithographic printing plate support obtained has a more improved resistance to spotting.
  • the surfaces roughening treatment is a treatment in which electrochemical graining treatment is carried out after mechanical graining treatment and chemical etching treatment are carried out as desired but also in cases where electrochemical graining treatments is carried out without performing mechanical graining treatment, electrochemical graining treatment may be preceded by chemical etching treatment using an aqueous alkali solution such as sodium hydroxide. In this way, impurities which are present in the vicinity of the surface of the aluminum alloy plate can be removed.
  • Electrochemical graining treatment easily forms fine pits at the surfaces of the aluminum alloy plate and is therefore suitable to prepare a lithographic printing plate having excellent printability.
  • Electrochemical graining treatment is carried out in an aqueous solution containing nitric acid or hydrochloric acid as its main ingredient using direct or alternating current.
  • Electrochemical graining treatment enables craterlike or honeycomb pits having an average diameter of about 0.5 to 20 ⁇ m to be produced at the surface of the aluminum alloy plate at a surface area ratio of 30 to 100%. Pits having appropriate properties have the effect of improving the resistance to severe scumming and press life of the lithographic printing plate. Electrochemical graining treatment is not particularly limited for its conditions but may be carried out on the lithographic printing plate support of the invention under general conditions.
  • Electrochemical graining treatment is preferably followed by chemical etching treatment described below. Smut and intermetallic compounds are present at the surface of the aluminum alloy plate having undergone electrochemical graining treatment.
  • chemical etching treatment following electrochemical graining treatment it is preferable for chemical etching using an alkali solution (alkali etching treatment) to be first carried out in order to particularly remove smut with high efficiency.
  • the conditions in chemical etching using an alkali solution preferably include a treatment temperature of 20 to 80°C and a treatment time of 1 to 60 seconds. It is desirable for the alkali solution to contain aluminum ions.
  • the conditions in desmutting treatment preferably include a treatment temperature of 20 to 80°C and a treatment time of 1 to 60 seconds.
  • Exemplary acid solutions that may be used include solutions containing nitric acid, hydrochloric acid, or sulfuric acid as their main ingredient.
  • desmutting treatment is preferably carried out to remove smut efficiently.
  • the conditions in desmutting treatment preferably include a treatment temperature of 20 to 80°C and a treatment time of 1 to 60 seconds.
  • Exemplary acid solutions that may be used include solutions containing nitric acid, hydrochloric acid or sulfuric acid as their main ingredient. Of these, solutions containing hydrochloric acid as the main ingredient are preferably used.
  • chemical etching treatment is not particularly limited and may be carried out by immersion, showering, coating or other process.
  • the lithographic printing plate support of the invention is obtained by anodizing the aluminum alloy plate having undergone the surface roughening treatment.
  • electrolyte that may be used in anodizing treatment as long as a porous oxide film can be formed.
  • use may be made of sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, oxalic acid, chromic acid or a mixture thereof.
  • the concentration of the electrolyte is determined as appropriate for the type of the electrolyte used.
  • the anodizing treatment conditions considerably vary depending on the electrolyte used and are therefore not particularly limited, although it is generally suitable for the solution to have an electrolyte concentration of 1 to 80 wt% and a temperature of 5 to 70°C, and for the current density to be 1 to 60 A/dm 2 , the voltage to be 1 to 100 V, and the electrolysis time to be 10 to 300 seconds.
  • the lithographic printing plate support of the invention is preferably one obtained by carrying out hydrophilizing treatment following anodizing treatment.
  • suitable hydrophilizing treatments include the potassium hexafluorozirconate treatment described in US 2,946,638 , the phosphomolybdate treatment described in US 3,201,247 , the alkyl titanate treatment described in GB 1,108,559 B , the polyacrylic acid treatment described in DE 1,091,433 B , the polyvinylphosphonic acid treatments described in DE 1,134,093 B and GB 1,230,447 B , the phosphoric acid treatment described in JP 44-6409 B , the phytic acid treatment described in US 3,307,951 , the treatments involving the divalent metal salts of lipophilic organic polymeric compounds described in JP 58-16893 A and JP 58-18291 A , a treatment like that described in US 3,860,426 in which an aqueous metal salt (e.g., zinc acetate)-containing hydrophilic cellulose (e.g., carboxymethyl cellulose) undercoat is provided, and an undercoating
  • suitable hydrophilizing treatments include those which involve undercoating the aluminum alloy plate with the phosphates mentioned in JP 62-19494 A , the water-soluble epoxy compounds mentioned in JP 62-33692 A , the phosphoric acid-modified starches mentioned in JP 62-97892 A , the diamine compounds mentioned in JP 63-56498 A , the inorganic or organic salts of amino acids mentioned in JP 63-130391 A , the carboxy or hydroxy group-bearing organic phosphonic acids mentioned in JP 63-145092 A , the amino group- and phosphonate group-bearing compounds mentioned in JP 63-165183 A , the specific carboxylic acid derivatives mentioned in JP 2-316290 A , the phosphate esters mentioned in JP 3-215095 A , the compounds having one amino group and one phosphorus oxo acid group mentioned in JP 3-261592 A , the phosphate esters mentioned in JP 3-215095 A , the aliphatic or
  • Coloration with an acid dye as mentioned in JP 60-64352 A may also be carried out.
  • hydrophilizing treatment by a method in which the aluminum alloy plate is immersed in an aqueous solution of an alkali metal silicate such as sodium silicate or potassium silicate, or is coated with a hydrophilic vinyl polymer or a hydrophilic compound so as to form a hydrophilic undercoat.
  • an alkali metal silicate such as sodium silicate or potassium silicate
  • Hydrophilizing treatment with an aqueous solution of an alkali metal silicate such as sodium silicate or potassium silicate can be carried out according to the processes and procedures described in US 2,714,066 and US 3,181,461 .
  • alkali metal silicates include sodium silicate, potassium silicate and lithium silicate.
  • the aqueous solution of an alkali metal silicate may include also a suitable amount of, for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide or lithium hydroxide.
  • the aqueous solution of an alkali metal silicate may include also an alkaline earth metal salt or a Group 4 (Group IVA) metal salt.
  • suitable alkaline earth metal salts include nitrates such as calcium nitrate, strontium nitrate, magnesium nitrate and barium nitrate; and also sulfates, hydrochlorides, phosphates, acetates, oxalates, and borates.
  • Exemplary Group 4 (Group IVA) metal salts include titanium tetrachloride, titanium trichloride, titanium potassium fluoride, titanium potassium oxalate, titanium sulfate, titanium tetraiodide, zirconyl chloride, zirconium dioxide and zirconium tetrachloride. These alkaline earth metal salts and Group 4 (Group IVA) metal salts may be used singly or in combination of two or more thereof.
  • the amount of silicon adsorbed as a result of alkali metal silicate treatment can be measured with a fluorescent x-ray analyzer, and is preferably 1.0 to 30 mg/m 2 ,
  • the alkali metal silicate treatment has the effect of enhancing the resistance at the surface of the lithographic printing plate support to dissolution in an alkali developer, suppressing the leaching of aluminum components into the developer, and reducing the generation of development scum arising from developer fatigue.
  • Hydrophilizing treatment for forming a hydrophilic undercoat may also be carried out according to the conditions and procedures described in JP 59-101651 A and JP 60-149491 A .
  • Hydrophilic vinyl polymers that may be used in such a method include copolymers of a sulfo group-bearing vinyl polymerizable compound such as polyvinyl sulfonic acid or sulfo group-bearing p-styrenesulfonic acid with a conventional vinyl polymerizable compound such as an alkyl (meth)acrylate.
  • hydrophilic compounds that may be used in this method include compounds having at least one group selected from among -NH 2 group, -COOH group and sulfo group.
  • the lithographic printing plate support is preferably obtained by subjecting the aluminum alloy plate to the respective treatments described in Aspects A to C in the orders shown below. Rinsing with water is desirably carried out between the respective treatments. However, in cases where a solution of the same composition is used in the consecutively carried out two steps (treatments), rinsing with water may be omitted.
  • Mechanical graining treatment, electrochemical graining treatment, chemical etching treatment, anodizing treatment and hydrophilizing treatment in (1) to (12) described above may be carried out by the same treatment methods and conditions as those described above, but the treatment methods and conditions to be described below are preferably used to carry out such treatments.
  • Mechanical graining treatment is preferably carried out by using a rotating nylon brush roll having a bristle diameter of 0.2 to 1.61 mm and a slurry supplied to the surface of the aluminum alloy plate.
  • abrasives may be used and illustrative examples that may be preferably used include silica sand, quartz, aluminum hydroxide and a mixture thereof, A detailed description is given in JP 6-135175 A and JP 50-40047 B .
  • the slurry preferably has a specific gravity of 1.05 to 1.3.
  • Use may be made of a technique that involves spraying of the slurry, a technique that involves the use of a wire brush, or a technique in which the surface shape of a textured mill roll is transferred to the aluminum alloy plate.
  • Other techniques are described in JP 55-074898 A , JP 61-162351 A and JP 63-104889 A .
  • the aqueous alkali solution that may be used in chemical etching treatment in the aqueous alkali solution has a concentration of preferably 1 to 30 wt% and may contain aluminum and also alloying ingredients present in the aluminum alloy in an amount of 0 to 10 wt%.
  • An aqueous solution composed mainly of sodium hydroxide is preferably used for the aqueous alkali solution.
  • Chemical etching is preferably carried out at a solution temperature of room temperature to 95°C for a period of 1 to 120 seconds.
  • removal of the treatment solution with nip rollers and rinsing by spraying with water are preferably carried out in order to prevent the treatment solution from being carried into the subsequent step.
  • the aluminum alloy plate is dissolved in an amount of preferably 0.5 to 30 g/m 2 , more preferably 1.0 to 20 g/m 2 , and even more preferably 3.0 to 15 g/m 2 .
  • the aluminum alloy plate is dissolved in an amount of 0.001 to 30 g/m 2 , more preferably 0.1 to 4 g/m 2 , and even more preferably 0.2 to 1.5 g/m 2 .
  • the aluminum alloy plate is dissolved in an amount of preferably 0.001 to 30 g/m 2 , more preferably 0.01 to 0.8 g/m 2 , and even more preferably 0.02 to 0.3 g/m 2 .
  • phosphoric acid In chemical etching treatment in an aqueous acid solution (first to third desmutting treatments), phosphoric acid, nitric acid, sulfuric acid, chromic acid, hydrochloric acid or a mixed acid containing two or more thereof may be advantageously used.
  • the aqueous acid solution preferably has a concentration of 0.5 to 60 wt%.
  • Aluminum and also alloying ingredients present in the aluminum alloy may dissolve in the aqueous acid solution in an amount of 0 to 5 wt%.
  • Chemical etching is preferably carried out at a solution temperature of room temperature to 95°C for a treatment time of 1 to 120 seconds. After the end of desmutting treatment, removal of the treatment solution with nip rollers and rinsing by spraying with water are preferably carried out in order to prevent the treatment solution from being carried into the subsequent step.
  • aqueous solution which is used in conventional electrochemical graining treatments involving the use of direct current or alternating current may be employed for the nitric acid-based aqueous solution used in the first electrochemical graining treatment.
  • the aqueous solution to be used may be prepared by adding to an aqueous solution having a nitric acid concentration of 1 to 100 g/L at least one nitrate compound containing nitrate ions, such as aluminum nitrate, sodium nitrate or ammonium nitrate, or at least one chloride compound containing chloride ions, such as aluminum chloride, sodium chloride or ammonium chloride in a range of 1 g/L to saturation.
  • Metals which are present in the aluminum alloy such as iron, copper, manganese, nickel, titanium, magnesium and silicon may also be dissolved in the nitric acid-based aqueous solution.
  • a solution to which aluminum chloride or aluminum nitrate is added so that a 0.5 to 2 wt% aqueous solution of nitric acid may contain 3 to 50 g/L of aluminum ions.
  • the temperature is preferably from 10 to 90°C and more preferably from 40 to 80°C,
  • An aqueous solution which is used in conventional electrochemical graining treatment involving the use of direct current or alternating current may be employed for the hydrochloric acid-based aqueous solution used in the second electrochemical graining treatment.
  • the aqueous solution to be used may be prepared by adding to an aqueous solution having a hydrochloric acid concentration of 1 to 100 g/L at least one nitrate compound containing nitrate ions, such as aluminum nitrate, sodium nitrate or ammonium nitrate, or at least one chloride compound containing chloride ions, such as aluminum chloride, sodium chloride or ammonium chloride in a range of 1 g/L to saturation.
  • Metals which are present in the aluminum alloy such as iron, copper, manganese, nickel, titanium, magnesium and silicon may also be dissolved in the hydrochloric acid-based aqueous solution.
  • a solution to which aluminum chloride or aluminum nitrate is added so that a 0.5 to 2 wt% aqueous solution of nitric acid may contain 3 to 50 g/L of aluminum ions.
  • the temperature is preferably from 10 to 60°C and more preferably from 20 to 50°C. Hypochlorous acid may be added to the aqueous solution.
  • an aqueous solution which is used in conventional electrochemical graining treatment involving the use of direct current or alternating current may be employed for the hydrochloric acid-based aqueous solution used in electrochemical graining treatment in the aqueous hydrochloric acid solution.
  • the aqueous solution to be used may be prepared by adding 0 to 30 g/L of sulfuric acid to an aqueous solution having a hydrochloric acid concentration of 1 to 100 g/L.
  • the aqueous solution may be prepared by adding to this aqueous solution at least one nitrate compound containing nitrate ions, such as aluminum nitrate, sodium nitrate or ammonium nitrate, or at least one chloride compound containing chloride ions, such as aluminum chloride, sodium chloride or ammonium chloride in a range of 1 g/L to saturation.
  • nitrate compound containing nitrate ions such as aluminum nitrate, sodium nitrate or ammonium nitrate
  • chloride compound containing chloride ions such as aluminum chloride, sodium chloride or ammonium chloride in a range of 1 g/L to saturation.
  • Metals which are present in the aluminum alloy such as iron, copper, manganese, nickel, titanium, magnesium and silicon may also be dissolved in the hydrochloric acid-based aqueous solution.
  • a solution to which aluminum chloride or aluminum nitrate is added so that a 0.5 to 2 wt% aqueous solution of nitric acid may contain 3 to 50 g/L of aluminum-ions.
  • the temperature is preferably from 10 to 60°C and more preferably from 20 to 50°C. Hypochlorous acid may be added to the aqueous solution.
  • a sinusoidal, square, trapezoidal or triangular waveform may be used as the waveform of the alternating current in electrochemical graining treatment.
  • the frequency is preferably from 0.1 to 250 Hz.
  • FIG. 1 is a graph showing an example of an alternating current waveform that may be used to carry out electrochemical graining treatment in the method of manufacturing a lithographic printing plate support of the invention.
  • ta represents the anodic reaction time
  • tc the cathodic reaction time
  • tp the time required for the current to reach a peak from zero
  • Ia the peak current on the anode cycle side
  • Ic the peak current on the cathode cycle side.
  • the time tp until the current reaches a peak from zero it is preferable for the time tp until the current reaches a peak from zero to be from 1 to 10 ms.
  • a time tp of less than 1 ms under the influence of impedance in the power supply circuit, a large power supply voltage is required at the leading edge of the current pulse, thus increasing the power supply equipment costs.
  • One cycle of alternating current that may be used in electrochemical graining treatment preferably satisfies the following conditions: the ratio of the cathodic reaction time to to the anodic reaction time ta in the aluminum alloy plate (tc/ta) is from 1 to 20; the ratio of the amount of electricity Qc when the aluminum alloy plate serves as a cathode to the amount of electricity Qa when it serves as an anode (Qc/Qa) is from 0.3 to 20; and the anodic reaction time ta is from 5 to 1,000 ms.
  • the ratio tc/ta is more preferably from 2.5 to 15.
  • the ratio Qc/Qa is more preferably from 2.5 to 15.
  • the current density at the current peak in the trapezoidal waveform is preferably from 10 to 200 A/dm 2 on both of the anode cycle side (Ia) and the cathode cycle side (Ic).
  • the ratio Ic/Ia is preferably in a range of 0.3 to 20.
  • the total amount of electricity furnished for the anodic reaction on the aluminum alloy plate up until completion of electrochemical graining treatment is preferably from 25 to 1,000 C/dm 2 ,
  • any known electrolytic cell employed for surface treatment including vertical, flat and radial type electrolytic cells, may be used to carry out electrochemical graining treatment using alternating current.
  • Radial-type electrolytic cells such as those described in JP 5-195300 A are especially preferred.
  • the electrolytic solution is passed through the electrolytic cell either parallel or counter to the direction in which the aluminum alloy plate (aluminum web) advances.
  • One or more AC power supplies may be connected to one electrolytic cell. Two or more electrolytic cells may also be used.
  • An apparatus shown in FIG. 2 may be used for electrochemical graining treatment using alternating current.
  • FIG. 2 is a side view of a radial electrolytic cell that may be used in electrochemical graining treatment with alternating current in the method of manufacturing the lithographic printing plate support of the invention.
  • FIG. 2 shows a main electrolytic cell 50, an AC power supply 51, a radial drum roller 52, main electrodes 53a and 53b, a solution feed inlet 54, an electrolytic solution 55, auxiliary anodes 58, an auxiliary anode cell 60 and an aluminum alloy plate W.
  • electrolysis may be carried out under the same or different conditions.
  • the aluminum alloy plate W is wound around the radial drum roller 52 disposed so as to be immersed in the electrolytic solution within the main electrolytic cell 50 and is electrolyzed by the main electrodes 53a and 53b connected to the AC power supply 51 as it is transported,
  • the electrolytic solution 55 is fed from the solution feed inlet 54 through a slit 56 to a solution channel 57 between the radial drum roller 52 and the main electrodes 53a and 53b.
  • the aluminum alloy plate W treated in the main electrolytic cell 50 is then electrolyzed in the auxiliary anode cell 60.
  • the auxiliary anodes 58 are disposed in a face-to-face relationship with the aluminum alloy plate W so that the electrolytic solution 55 flows through the space between the auxiliary anodes 58 and the aluminum alloy plate W.
  • electrochemical graining treatment may be carried out by a method in which the aluminum alloy plate is electrochemically grained by applying direct current between the aluminum alloy plate and the electrodes opposed thereto.
  • An electrolytic solution which is used in known electrochemical graining treatment involving the use of direct current or alternating current may be used.
  • the temperature is preferably from 10 to 80°C.
  • a known treatment apparatus using direct current can be employed for electrochemical graining treatment involving the use of direct current, but an apparatus as described in JP 1-141094 A is preferably used in which one or more pairs of anodes and cathodes are disposed alternately.
  • Exemplary known apparatuses are described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application No. 5-68204 , Japanese Patent Application No. 6-205657 , Japanese Patent Application No. 6-21050 , JP 61-19115 A , and JP 57-44760 B .
  • Direct current may be applied between the conductor roll in contact with the aluminum alloy plate and the cathode opposed thereto to carry out electrochemical graining treatment on the aluminum alloy plate serving as the anode.
  • electrochemical graining treatment After the end of electrolytic treatment, removal of the treatment solution with nip rollers and rinsing by spraying with water are preferably carried out in order to prevent the treatment solution from being carried into the subsequent step.
  • the direct current used for electrochemical graining preferably has a ripple ratio of not more than 20%.
  • the current density is preferably from 10 to 200 A/dm 2 and the amount of electricity when the aluminum alloy plate serves as the anode is preferably from 25 to 1,000 C/dm 2 .
  • the anode to be used may be selected from known electrodes for generating oxygen including ones formed by cladding or plating valve metals such as titanium, niobium and zirconium with ferrite, iridium oxide, and platinum.
  • the cathode to be used may be selected from among carbon, platinum, titanium, niobium, zirconium stainless steel and other materials for use in fuel cell cathodes.
  • the presensitized plate of the invention can be obtained by forming an image recording layer on the lithographic printing plate support of the invention.
  • the image recording layer that may be used in the presensitized plate of the invention can be removed by printing ink and/or fountain solution. More specifically, the image recording layer is preferably one which has an infrared absorber, a polymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound and is capable of recording by exposure to infrared light.
  • irradiation with infrared light cures exposed portions of the image recording layer to form hydrophobic (lipophilic) regions, while at the start of printing, unexposed portions are promptly removed from the support by fountain solution, ink, or an emulsion of ink and fountain solution.
  • an infrared absorber is usually used.
  • the infrared absorber has the function of converting absorbed infrared light into heat and the function of transferring electrons and energy to the polymerization initiator (radical generator) to be described below by excitation with infrared light.
  • the infrared absorber that may be used in the invention is a dye or pigment having an absorption maximum in a wavelength range of 760 to 1200 nm.
  • Dyes which may be used include commercial dyes and known dyes that are mentioned in the technical literature, such as Senryo Binran [Handbook of Dyes] (The Society of Synthetic Organic Chemistry, Japan, 1970 ).
  • Suitable dyes include azo dyes, metal complex azo dyes, pyrazolone azo dyes, naphthoquinone dyes, anthraquinone dyes, phthalocyanine dyes, carbonium dyes, quinoneimine dyes, methine dyes, cyanine dyes, squarylium dyes, pyrylium salts and metal-thiolate complexes.
  • Preferred dyes include the cyanine dyes mentioned in JP 58-125246 A , JP 59-84356 A , JP 60-78787 A and GB 434,875 B ; the methine dyes mentioned in JP 58-173696 A , JP 58-181690 A and JP 58-194595 A ; the naphthoquinone dyes mentioned in JP 58-112793 A , JP 58-224793 A , JP 59-48187 A , JP 59-73996 A , JP 60-52940 A and JP 60-63744 A ; and the squarylium dyes mentioned in JP 58-112792 A .
  • exemplary dyes that may be preferably used include the near-infrared absorbing dyes mentioned in US 4,756,993 as represented by the formulas (I) and (II).
  • the dyes that may be advantageously used include the near-infrared absorbers/sensitizers mentioned in US 5,156,938 .
  • Other compounds that are suitable for use in this way include the substituted arylbenzo(thio)pyrylium salts mentioned in US 3,881,924 ; the trimethinethiapyrylium salts mentioned in JP 57-142645 A ( US 4,327,169 ), the pyrylium compounds mentioned in JP 58-181051 A , JP 58-220143 A , JP 59-41363 A , JP 59-84248 A , JP 59-84249 A , JP 59-146063 A and JP 59-146061 A ; the cyanide dyes mentioned in JP 59-216146 A ; the pentamethinethiopyrylium salts mentioned in US 4,283,475 ; and the pyrylium compounds mentioned in JP 5-13514 B and JP 5-19702
  • the dyes include the infrared absorbing dyes and more specifically specific indolenine cyanine dyes mentioned in JP 2002-278057 A which are illustrated below.
  • cyanine dyes Of the illustrated dyes, cyanine dyes, squarylium dyes, pyrylium salts, nickel-thiolate complexes and indolenine cyanine dyes are particularly preferred. In addition, cyanine dyes and indolenine cyanine dyes are more preferred, and cyanine dyes of the general formula (i) below are most preferred.
  • X 1 is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, -NPh 2 (where "Ph” represents a phenyl group), -X 2 -L 1 , or a group of the following formula.
  • X 2 is an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom or a sulfur atom
  • L 1 is a hydrocarbon group of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, an aromatic ring having a heteroatom, or a hydrocarbon group of 1 to 12 carbon atoms having a heteroatom.
  • Hetaroatom refers to a nitrogen, sulfur, oxygen, halogen or selenium atom.
  • X a - is defined in the same way as Z a - described below; and R a is a substituent selected from among hydrogen atom, alkyl groups, aryl groups, substituted or unsubstituted amino groups and halogen atoms.
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently a hydrocarbon group of 1 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • R 1 and R 2 each to be a hydrocarbon group having at least two carbon atoms. It is especially preferable for R 1 and R 2 to be bonded together so as to form a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • Ar 1 and Ar 2 are each independently an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may be substituted.
  • Preferred aromatic hydrocarbon groups include benzene and naphthalene rings.
  • Preferred substituents include hydrocarbon groups of up to 12 carbon atoms, halogen atoms, and alkoxy groups of up to 12 carbon atoms, with hydrocarbon groups of up to 12 carbon atoms and alkoxy groups of up to 12 carbon atoms being most preferred.
  • Y 1 and Y 2 are each independently a sulfur atom or a dialkylmethylene group of up to 12 carbon atoms.
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently a hydrocarbon group of up to 20 carbon atoms which may be substituted.
  • Preferred substituents include alkoxy groups of up to 12 carbon atoms, carboxy group and sulfo group, with alkoxy groups of up to 12 carbon atoms being most preferred.
  • R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group of up to 12 carbon atoms. In consideration of the availability of the starting materials, it is preferable for each of R 5 to R 5 to be a hydrogen atom.
  • Z a - represents a counteranion.
  • Z a - is unnecessary.
  • preferred examples of Z a - include halide ions (e.g., Cl - and Br - ), perchlorate ion (ClO 4 - ), tetrafluoroborate ion (BF 4 - ), hexafluorophosphate ion (PF 6 - ) and sulfonate ion. Of these, perchlorate ion, tetrafluoroborate ion, hexafluorophosphate ion and arylsulfonate ion are more preferred.
  • cyanine dyes of the general formula (i) that may be preferably used in the invention include those described in Paragraphs [0017] to [0019] of JP 2001-133969 A .
  • cyanine dyes include the specific indolenine cyanine dyes mentioned in JP 2002-278057 A .
  • Pigments which may be used include commercial pigments and pigments mentioned in the technical literature, such as the Colour Index (C.I.), Saishin Ganryo Binran [Latest Handbook of Pigments] (Japan Association of Pigment Technology, 1977 ), Saishin Ganryo Oyo Gijutsu [Recent Pigment Applications Technology] (CMC Publishing Co., Ltd., 1986 ), and Insatsu Inki Gijutsu [Printing Ink Technology] (CMC Publishing Co., Lid., 1984 ).
  • Suitable pigments include black pigments, yellow pigments, orange pigments, brown pigments, red pigments, violet pigments, blue pigments, green pigments, fluorescent pigments, metal powder pigments and polymer-bonded dyes.
  • pigments include insoluble azo pigments, azo lake pigments, condensed azo pigments, chelate azo pigments, phthalocyanine pigments, anthraquinone pigments, perylene and perinone pigments, thioindigo pigments, guinacridone pigments, dioxazine pigments, isoindolinone pigments, quinophthalone pigments, lake pigments, azine pigments, nitroso pigments, nitro pigments, natural pigments, fluorescent pigments, inorganic pigments and carbon black.
  • carbon black is preferred.
  • the pigments may be used without being surface treated or may be used after surface treatment.
  • Examples of surface treatment methods include surface coating with a resin or wax, surfactant deposition, and bonding a reactive substance (e.g., a silane coupling agent, an epoxy compound or a polyisocyanate) to the pigment surface.
  • a reactive substance e.g., a silane coupling agent, an epoxy compound or a polyisocyanate
  • the pigment has a particle size which is in a range of preferably 0.01 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.05 to 1 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 0.1 to 1 ⁇ m.
  • the particle size of the pigment is within the above range, the pigment dispersion has a good stability in the image recording layer-forming coating fluid, and an image recording layer obtained has a good uniformity.
  • dispersion techniques such as those which can be used in ink production or toner production, may be employed as the method for dispersing the pigment.
  • Illustrative examples of equipment that may be used for this purpose include an ultrasonic disperse, a sand mill, an attritor, a pearl mill, a super mill, a ball mill, an impeller, a disperser, a KD mill, a colloid mill, a dynatron, a three-roll mill and a pressure kneader.
  • these infrared absorbers may be added to the layer that includes the other ingredients or may be added to a separately provided layer, they are added so that the image recording layer may have an absorbance, as measured by reflectrometry at a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength range of 760 nm to 1,200 nm, of 0.3 to 1,2 when a negative-type presensitized plate is prepared.
  • the absorbance is preferably in a range of 0.4 to 1.1. Within this range, a uniform polymerization reaction proceeds in the depth direction of the image recording layer to achieve high film strength in image areas and good adhesion to the lithographic printing plate support.
  • the absorbance of the image recording layer can be adjusted by the amount of infrared absorber added to the image recording layer and the thickness of the image recording layer.
  • the absorbance may be measured by an ordinary method. Exemplary measurement methods include one which involves forming on a reflective support made of aluminum or the like, an image recording layer having a thickness appropriately determined so that the coating weight after drying falls within the necessary range for the lithographic printing plate, and measuring the reflection density with an optical densitometer, and one which involves measuring the absorbance with a spectrophotometer by a reflection method using an integrating sphere.
  • Exemplary polymerization initiators which may be used are compounds that generate a radical under light or heat energy or both, and initiate or promote the polymerization of a compound having a polymerizable unsaturated group.
  • compounds that generate a radical under the action of heat are preferably used.
  • thermal polymerisation initiators compounds having a small bond dissociation energy and photopolymerization initiators may be used as the polymerization initiator.
  • Compounds which generate a radical include organic halogen compounds, carbonyl compounds, organic peroxides, azo polymerization initiators, azide compounds, metallocene compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, organic borate compounds, disulfone compounds, oxime ester compounds and onium salt compounds.
  • Organic halogen compounds that may be used include those mentioned in, for example, Wakabayashi et al.: Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan 42, 2924 (1969 ), US 3,905,815 , JP 46-4605 B , JP 48-36281 A , JP 55-32070 A , JP 60-239736 A , JP 61-169835 A , JP 61-169837 A , JP 62-58241 A , JP 62-212401 A , JP 63-70243 A , JP 63-298339 A , and M.P. Hutt: Journal of Heterocyclic Chemistry 1, No. 3 (1970 ). Specifically, the use of oxazole compounds and s-triazine compounds substituted with a trihalomethyl group is preferred.
  • s-triazine derivatives having at least one mono-, di- or trihalogenated methyl group attached to the s-triazine ring is more preferred.
  • Compounds that may be used include, more specifically, 2,'4,6-tris(monochloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2,4,6-tris(dichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2,4,6-tris(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-methyl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-n-propyl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-( ⁇ , ⁇ , ⁇ ,-trichloroethyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-phenyl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-(p-methoxyphenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-
  • azo polymerization initiators examples include the azo compounds mentioned in JP 8-108621 A .
  • organic peroxides examples include trimethylcyclohexanone peroxide, acetylacetone peroxide, 1,1-bis(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane, 1,1-bis(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane, 2,2-bis(tert-butylperoxy)butane, tert-butyl hydroperoxide, cumene hydroperoxide, diisopropylbenzene hydroperoxide, 2,5-dimethylhexane-2,5-dihydroperoxid, 1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl hydroperoxide, tert-butylcumyl peroxide, dicumyl peroxide, 2,5-dimethyl-2,5-di(tert-butylperoxy)hexane, 2,5-oxanoyl peroxide, succinic acid peroxide, benzoyl peroxide, 2,4-d
  • Metallocene compounds that may be used include various titanocene compounds mentioned in, for example, JP 59-152396 A , JP 61-151197 A , JP 63-41484 A , JP 2-249 A , JP 2-4705 A and JP 5-83588 A , such as dicyclopentadienyltitanium bisphenyl, dicyclopentadienyltitanium bis-2,6-difluorophen-1-yl, dicyclopentadienyltitanium bis-2,4-difluorophen-1-yl, dicyclopentadienyltitanium bis-2,4,6-trifluorophen-1-yl, dicyclopentadienyltitanium bis-2,3,5,6-tetrafluorophen-1-yl, dicyclopentadienyltitanium bis-2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorophen-1-yl, dimethylcyclopent
  • Hexaarylbiimidazole compounds that may be used include various compounds mentioned in, for example, JP 6-25285 B , US 3,479,185 , US 4,311,793 and US 4,622,286 . Specific examples include 2,2'-bis(o-chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o-bromophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o,p-dichlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o-chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetra(m-methoxyphenyl)biimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o,o'-dichlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbi
  • organic boron compounds examples include the organic berates mentioned in, for example, JP 62-143044 A , JP 62-150242 A , JP 9-188685 A , JP 9-188686 A , JP 9-188710 A , JP 2000-131837 A , JP 2002-107916 A , JP 2764769 B , JP 2002-116539 A and by Martin Kunz in Rad Tech' 98.
  • disulfone compounds examples include the compounds mentioned in, for example, JP 61-166544 A and JP 2003-328465 A .
  • oxime ester compounds examples include the compounds mentioned in, for example, JCS Perkin II (1979) 1653-1660 , JCS Perkin II (1979) 156-162 , Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995) 202-232 , JP 2000-66385 A and JP 2000-80068 A . Specific examples include the compounds having the following structural formulas.
  • onium salt compounds that may be used include the diazonium salts mentioned by S.I. Schlesinger in Photogr. Sci. Eng. 18, 387 (1974 ) and by T.S. Bal et al. in Polymer 21, 423 (1980 ); the ammonium salts mentioned in US 4,069,055 and JP 4-365049 A ; the phosphonium salts mentioned in US 4,069,055 and US 4,069,056 ; the iodonium salts mentioned in EP 104,143 B , JP 2-150848 A and JP 2-296514 A ; the sulfonium salts mentioned in EP 370,693 B , EP 390,214B , EP 233,567 B , EP 297,443 B , EP 297,442 B , US 4,933,377 , US 410,201 , US 339,049 , US 4,760,013 , US 4,734,444 , US 2,833,827 , DE
  • the oxime ester compounds, diazonium salts, iodonium salts and sulfonium salts are preferred in terms of reactivity and stability.
  • these onium salts function not as acid generators but as ionic radical polymerization initiators.
  • the onium salts that may be preferably used are those represented by the following general formulas (RI-I) to (RI-III).
  • Ar 11 -N + N (RI-I) Z 11- Ar 21 -I + -Ar 22 (RI-II) Z 21-
  • Ar 11 is an aryl group of up to 20 carbon atoms which may have 1 to 6 substituents.
  • Referred substituents include alkyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkenyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkynyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, aryl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkoxy groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, aryloxy groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, halogen atoms, alkylamino groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, dialkylamino groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkylamide or arylamide groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, carbonyl group, carboxy group, cyano group, sulfonyl group, thioalkyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms and thioaryl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Z 11- is a monovalent anion, specific examples of which include halide ions (e.g., Cl - and Br - ), perchlorate ion (ClO 4 - ), hexafluorophosphate ion (PF 6 - ), tetrafluoroborate ion (BF 4 - ), sulfonate ion, sulfinate ion, thiosulfonate ion and sulfate ion.
  • perchlorate ion, hexafluorophosphate ion, tetrafluoroborate ion, sulfonate ion and sulfinate ion are preferred for good stability.
  • Ar 21 and Ar 22 are each independently an aryl group of up to 20 carbon atoms which may have 1 to 6 substituents.
  • Preferred substituents include alkyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkenyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkynyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, aryl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkoxy groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, aryloxy groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, halogen atoms, alkylamino groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, dialkylamino groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkylamide or arylamide groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, carbonyl group, carboxy group, cyano group, sulfonyl group, thioalkyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms and thioaryl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Z 21- is a monovalent anion, specific examples of which include halide ions (e.g., Cl - and Br - ), perchlorate ion (ClO 4 - ), hexafluorophosphate ion (PF 6 - ), tetrafluoroborate ion (BF 4 - ), sulfonate ion, sulfinate ion, thiosulfonate ion and sulfate ion.
  • halide ions e.g., Cl - and Br -
  • perchlorate ion ClO 4 -
  • PF 6 - hexafluorophosphate ion
  • BF 4 - tetrafluoroborate ion
  • sulfonate ion sulfinate ion
  • thiosulfonate ion thiosulfonate ion and sulfate ion.
  • perchlorate ion perchlorate ion, hexafluorophosphate ion., tetrafluoroborate ion, sulfonate ion, sulfinate ion and carboxylate ion are preferred for good stability and reactivity.
  • R 31 , R 32 and R 33 are each independently an aryl, alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl group of up to 20 carbon atoms which may have 1 to 6 substituents. Of these, aryl groups are preferred for good reactivity and stability.
  • Preferred substituents include alkyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkenyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkynyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, aryl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkoxy groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, aryloxy groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, halogen atoms, alkylamino groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, dialkylamino groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkylamide or arylamide groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, carbonyl group, carboxy group, cyano group, sulfonyl group, thioalkyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms and thioaryl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Z 31- is a monovalent anion, specific examples of which include halide ions (e.g., Cl - and Br - ), perchlorate ion (ClO 4 - ), hexafluorophosphate ion (PF 6 - ), tetrafluoroborate ion (BF 4 - ), sulfonate ion, sulfinate ion, thiosulfonate ion and sulfate ion.
  • halide ions e.g., Cl - and Br -
  • perchlorate ion ClO 4 -
  • PF 6 - hexafluorophosphate ion
  • BF 4 - tetrafluoroborate ion
  • sulfonate ion sulfinate ion
  • thiosulfonate ion thiosulfonate ion and sulfate ion.
  • perchlorate ion, hexafluorophosphate ion, tetrafluoroborate ion, sulfonate ion, sulfinate ion and carboxylate ion are preferred for good stability and reactivity.
  • the carboxylate ion mentioned in JP 2001-343742 A is more preferred, and the carboxylate ion mentioned in JP 2002-148790 A is most preferred.
  • onium salts examples include PF 6 - (N-3) PF 6 - (I-2) ClO 4 - (I-4) CF 3 SO 3 - (I-7) PF 6 - (I-10) ClO 4 - (I-14) PF 6 - (I-15) CF 3 COO - (I-17) CF 3 SO 3 - (I-18) PF 6 - (1-28) C 4 F 9 SO 3 - (I-29) PF 6 - (S-2) ClO 4 - (S-3) CF 3 SO 3 - (S-6) BF 4 - (S-15)
  • These polymerization initiators may be added in a proportion, based on all the solid ingredients making up the image recording layer, of 0.1 to 50 wt%, preferably 0.5 to 30 wt%, and more preferably 1 to 20 wt%.
  • polymerisation initiator content within the above-defined range.
  • These polymerization initiators may be used singly or in combination of two or more thereof. These polymerization initiators may be added to the layer that includes the other ingredients or may be added to a separately provided layer.
  • Polymerizable compounds are addition Polymerizable compounds having at least one ethylenically unsaturated double bond, and are selected from compounds having at least one, and preferably two or more, terminal ethylenically unsaturated bonds.
  • any addition polymerizable compound known in the prior art without particular limitation.
  • Such compounds have a variety of chemical forms, including monomers, prepolymers such as dimers, trimers and oligomers, mixtures of any of the above, and copolymers of any of the above.
  • the monomers and copolymers are exemplified by unsaturated carboxylic acids (e.g., acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid) and esters and amides thereof.
  • unsaturated carboxylic acids e.g., acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid
  • esters and amides thereof it is preferable to use an ester of an unsaturated carboxylic acid with an aliphatic polyol or an amide of an unsaturated carboxylic acid with an aliphatic polyamine compound.
  • Preferred use can also be made of the addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a nucleophilic substituent such as a hydroxy, amino or mercapto group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanate or epoxy compound; the dehydration condensation reaction product of the foregoing ester or amide with a monofunctional or polyfunctional carboxylic acid; the addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having an electrophilic substituent such as an isocyanate or epoxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol; or the substitution reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a removable substituent such as a halogen atom or a tosyloxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol.
  • a nucleophilic substituent such as a hydroxy, amino or mercapto group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanate or epoxy compound
  • Illustrative examples of monomers which are esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyol compounds include acrylic acid esters, methacrylic acid esters, itaconic acid esters, crotonic acid esters, isocrotonic acid esters and maleic acid esters.
  • acrylic acid esters include ethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, 1,3-butanediol diacrylate, tetramethylene glycol diacrylate, propylene glycol diacrylate, neopentyl glycol diacrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, trimethylolpropane tri(acryloyloxypropyl)ether, trimethylolethane triacrylate, hexanediol diacrylate, 1,4-cyclohexanediol diacrylate, tetraethylene glycol diacrylate, pentaerythritol diacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, dipentaerythritol diacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, sorbitol triacrylate, sorbitol tetraacrylate, sorbitol pentaacrylate,
  • methacrylic acid esters include tetramethylene glycol dimethacrylate, triethylene glycol dimethacrylate, neopentyl glycol dimethacrylate, trimethylolpropane trimethacrylate, trimethylilethane trimethacrylate, ethylene glycol dimethacrylate, 1,3-butanediol dimethacrylate, hexanediol dimethacrylate, pentaerythritol dimethacrylate, pentaerythritol trimethacrylate, pentaerythritol tetramethacrylate, dipentaerythritol dimethacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, sorbitol trimethacrylate, sorbitol tetramethacrylate, bis[p-(3-methacryloxy-2-hydroxypropoxy)phenyl]dimethylmethane and bis[p-(methacryl
  • Itaconic acid esters include ethylene glycol diitaconate, propylene glycol diitaconate, 1,3-butanediol diitaconate, 1,4-butanediol diitaconate, tetramethylene glycol diitaconate, pentaerythritol diitaconate and sorbitol tetraitaconate.
  • Crotonic acid esters include ethylene glycol dicrotonate, tetramethylene glycol dicrotonate, pentaerythritol dicrotonate and sorbitol tetradicrotonate.
  • Isocrotonic acid esters include ethylene glycol diisocrotonate, pentaerythritol diisocrotonate and sorbitol tetraisocrotonate.
  • Maleic acid esters include ethylene glycol dimaleate, triethylene glycol dimaleate, pentaerythritol dimaleate and sorbitol tetramaleate.
  • esters include the aliphatic alcohol esters mentioned in JP 51-47334 B and JP 57-196231 A ; esters having aromatic skeletons such as those mentioned in JP 59-5240 A , JP 59-5241 A and JP 2-226149 A ; and the amino group-bearing esters mentioned in JP 1-165613 A .
  • ester monomers may be used in the form of a mixture.
  • amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids with aliphatic polyamines that may be used as monomers include methylenebis(acrylamide), methylenebis(methacrylamide), 1,6-hexamethylenebis(acrylamide), 1,6-hexamethylenebis(methacrylamide), diethylenetriaminetris(acrylamide), xylylenebis(acrylamide) and xylylenebis(methacrylamide).
  • Suitable amide-type monomers include those having a cyclohexylene structure which are mentioned in JP 54-21726 B .
  • Urethane-type addition polymerizable compounds prepared using an addition reaction between an isocyanate group and a hydroxy group are also suitable.
  • Specific examples include the vinylurethane compounds having two or more polymerizable vinyl groups per molecule that are obtained by adding a hydroxy group-bearing vinyl monomer of the general formula (A) below to the polyisocyanste compounds having two or more isocyanate groups per molecule mentioned in JP 48-41708 B .
  • CH 2 C(R 4 )COOCH 2 CH(R 5 )OH (A)
  • R 4 and R 5 each independently represent H or CH 3 .
  • Urethane acrylates such as those mentioned in JP 51-37193 A , JP 2-32293 B and JP 2-16765 B , and the urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide-type skeleton mentioned in JP 58-49860 B , JP 56-17654 B , JP 62-39417 B and JP 62-39418 B are also suitable.
  • addition Polymerizable compounds By using such addition Polymerizable compounds, photopolymerizable compositions of exceptional sensitivity (speed) can be obtained.
  • JP 46-43946 B JP 1-40337 B and JP 1-40336 B
  • vinylphotphonic acid compounds mentioned in JP 2-25493 A examples include the specific unsaturated compounds mentioned in JP 46-43946 B , JP 1-40337 B and JP 1-40336 B , and the vinylphotphonic acid compounds mentioned in JP 2-25493 A .
  • addition polymerizable compound for example, what type of structure it should have, whether to use one such compound alone or a combination of two or more thereof, and the amount of addition can be selected as desired in accordance with the performance characteristics ultimately intended for the presensitized plate. For example, selection may be based on the following criteria.
  • a structure having a high unsaturated group content per molecule is preferred. In most cases, a functionality of at least two is desirable. To increase the strength of image areas (i.e., the cured film), a functionally of three or more is preferred. Also effective are methods in which both the sensitivity and strength are adjusted by using in combination compounds having differing numbers of functional groups or differing polymerizable groups (e.g., acrylic acid esters, methacrylic acid esters, styrene compounds, vinyl ether compounds).
  • addition polymerizable compound and how it is used are also important factors affecting both the compatibility and dispersibility of the compound with respect to other ingredients in the image recording layer (e.g., binder polymers, initiators, colorants). For instance, sometimes the compatibility can be enhanced by using a low-purity compound or by using together two or more addition polymerizable compounds.
  • the addition, polymerizable compound is added in a proportion, with respect to the nonvolatile ingredients in the image recording layer of preferably 5 to 80 wt%, and more preferably 25 to 75 wt%.
  • These addition polymerizable compounds may be used singly or in combination of two or more thereof.
  • suitable structure, formulation and amount of addition may be arbitrarily selected from the viewpoints of the degree of polymerization inhibited by oxygen, resolution, fogging, changes in refractive index, and surface adhesiveness, and the arrangement of layers such as undercoat and topcoat and their coating method may optionally be carried out.
  • the image recording layer preferably contains finely divided polymer particles having a polymerizable reactive group in addition to the above-described infrared absorber, polymerisation initiator and polymerizable compound.
  • Exemplary finely divided polymer particles having a polymerizable reactive group include ones obtained by introducing a monomer having acryloyl group, methacryloyl group, vinyl group or allyl group into the polymer chain. These functional groups may be introduced into the finely divided polymer particles during polymerization or following polymerisation by the use of a polymer reaction.
  • a monomer having any of these polymerizable reactive groups is preferably subjected to emulsion polymerization, suspension polymerization, urethanization or other polycondensation reaction.
  • a monomer having no polymerizable reactive group may optionally be added as a copolymerization ingredient.
  • monomers having such functional groups include, but are not limited to, allyl methacrylate, allyl acrylate, vinyl methacrylate, vinyl acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, glycidyl acrylate, 2-isocyanate ethyl methaerylate, 2-isocyanate ethyl acrylate, 2-aminoethyl methaccylate, 2-aminoethyl acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl mcthacrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, maleic anhydride, bifunctional acrylate and difunctional methacrylate.
  • An Exemplary polymer reaction that may be used in cases where the polymerizable reactive functional groups are introduced following polymerization includes one described in WO 96-034316 .
  • the polymerizable reactive group-containing finely divided polymer particles may coalesce together by the influence of heat.
  • the finely divided polymer particles prefferably have each a hydrophilic surface and disperse in water.
  • a hydrophilic low molecular weight compound is adsorbed on the surfaces of the finely divided polymer particles, but this is not the sole method of the invention.
  • the finely divided polymer particles preferably have an average particle size of 0.01 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.05 to 2 ⁇ m, and most preferably 0.1 to 1 ⁇ m.
  • the resolution is lowered at a too large average particle size whereas the stability is impaired over time at a too small average particle size.
  • the finely divided polymer particles having a polymerizable reactive group may be used in the form of microcapsules or microgels that include a polymerizable reactive group-bearing compound with which no covalent bond is formed.
  • the invention is capable of using several embodiments depending on the methods of incorporating the constituents of the image recording layer into the image recording layer.
  • One is a molecular dispersion type image recording layer formed by a method as described in JP 2002-287334 A which involves dissolving the constituents in a suitable solvent and applying the resulting solution onto the support.
  • microcapsule type image recording layer formed by a method as described in JP 2001-277740 A or JP 2001-277742 A which involves including all or some of the constituents in microcapsules and incorporating the microcapsules into the image recording layer.
  • the microcapsule type image recording layer may also contain the constituents outside the microcapsules.
  • the microcapsule type image recording layer contains hydrophobic constituents in the microcapsules and hydrophilic constituents outside the microcapsules.
  • the image recording layer is preferably a microcapsule type image recording layer.
  • the finely divided polymer particles having a polymerizable reactive group that may be used in the invention are in the form of microcapsules or microgels which include a polymerizable reactive group-bearing compound.
  • the above-described polymerizable compounds may be used without any limitation for the Polymerizable reactive group-bearing compound.
  • Known methods may be used for microencapsulating the constituents of the image recording layer.
  • Illustrative examples include the methods involving the use of coacetvation described in US 2,800,457 and US 2,800,458 ; the methods that relay on interfacial polymerization described in US 3,287,154 , JP 38-19574 B and J?
  • Microcapsule walls preferred for use in this invention are those which have three-dimensional crosslinkages and are solvent-swellable. Accordingly, it is preferable for the microcapsule wall material to be selected from the group consisting of polyurea, polyurethane, polyester, polycarbonate, polyamide and a mixture thereof. Polyurea and polyurethane are especially preferred.
  • the microcapsule wall may include therein the polymerizable reactive group-bearing compound.
  • the microcapsule is preferably one having an average particle size of 0.01 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.05 to 2 ⁇ m, and most preferably 0.1 to 1 ⁇ m.
  • the resolution is lowered at a too large average particle size whereas the stability is impaired over time at a too small average particle size.
  • Such microcapsule may or may not coalesce together by the influence of heat.
  • use may be mode of a binder polymer in the image recording layer in order to improve the film forming properties of the image recording layer.
  • binder polymers may be used without any particular limitation and polymers having film forming properties are preferred.
  • binder polymers include acrylic resins, polyvinyl acetal resins, polyurethane resin, polyurea resins, polyimide resins, polyamide resins, epoxy resins, methacrylic resins, polystyrene resins, novolac phenolic resins, polyester resins, synthetic rubbers and natural rubbers.
  • Crosslinkability may be imparted to the binder polymer to enhance the film strength in image areas.
  • a crosslinkable functional group such as an ethylenically unsaturated bond may be introduced into the polymer main chain or side chain.
  • the crosslinkable functional groups may be introduced by copolymerization.
  • Exemplary polymers having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the main chain of the molecule include poly-1,4-butadiene and poly-1,4-isoprene.
  • Exemplary polymers having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the side chain of the molecule include polymers of esters or amides of acrylic acid or methacrylic acid, in which polymers the ester or amide residue (R in -COOR or -CONHR) has an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • the binder polymer having crosslinkability is cured by, for example, the addition of free radicals (polymerization initiating radicals, or propagation radicals during polymerization of the polymerizable compound) to the crosslinkable functional groups on the polymer to effect addition polymerization, either directly between polymers or via chain polymerization of the polymerisable compounds, so as to form crosslinks between the polymer molecules.
  • the binder polymer having crosslinkability is cured when atoms in the polymer (e.g., hydrogen atoms on carbon atoms adjacent to the crosslinkable functional groups) are pulled off by free radicals, thereby forming polymer radicals which bond together, resulting in the formation of crosslinks between the polymer molecules.
  • the crosslinkable group content in the binder polymer (content of radical-polymerizable unsaturated double bonds, as determined by iodometry) is preferably 0.1 to 10.0 mmol, more preferably 1.0 to 7.0 mmol, and most preferably 2.0 to 5.5 mmol, per gram of the binder polymer. Good sensitivity and storage stability are achieved at a crosslinkable group content within the above-defined range.
  • the binder polymer preferably has a high solubility or dispersibility in ink and/or fountain solution.
  • Lipophilic binder polymers are preferred in order to improve the solubility or dispersibility in ink, but hydrophilic binder polymers are preferred in order to improve the solubility or dispersibility in fountain solution.
  • hydrophilic binder polymers include those having hydrophilic groups, such as hydroxy, carboxy, carboxylate, hydroxyethyl, polyoxyethyl, hydroxypropyl, polyoxypropyl, amino, aminoethyl, aminopropyl, ammonium, amide, carboxymethyl, sulfonate and phosphate groups.
  • polymers and copolymers of hydroxyethyl methacrylate homopolymers and copolymers of hydroxyethyl acrylate, homopolymers and copolymers of hydroxypropyl methacrylate, homopolymers and copolymers of hydroxypropyl acrylate, homopolymers and copolymers of hydroxybutyl methacrylate, homopolymers and copolymers of hydroxybutyl acrylate, polyethylene glycols, hydroxypropylene polymers, polyvinyl alcohols, hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetates having a degree of hydrolysis of at least 60 mol%, and
  • the binder polymer has a weight-average molecular weight of preferably at least 5,000, and more preferably from 10,000 to 300,000, and has a number-average molecular weight of preferably at least 1,000, and more preferably from 2,000 to 250,000.
  • the polydispersity is preferably from 1.1 to 10.
  • the binder polymer may be synthesized by any method known in the art.
  • the solvent that may be used in the synthesis include tetrahydrofuran, ethylene dichloride, cyclohexanone, methyl ethyl ketone, acetone, methanol, ethanol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, 2-methoxyethyl acetate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, toluene, ethyl acetate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, dimethylsulfoxide, and water. These may be used alone or as mixtures of two or more thereof.
  • Known compounds such as azo initiators and peroxide initiators may be used for the radical polymerization initiator employed in synthesizing the binder polymer.
  • the content of the binder polymer is from 5 to 90 wt%, preferably from 5 to 80 wt% and more preferably from 10 to 70 wt% based on all the solid ingredients of the image recording layer. A high strength in image areas and good image forming properties are achieved at a binder polymer content within the above-defined range.
  • the polymerizable compound and the binder polymer are preferably used in a weight ratio of 0.5/1 to 4/1.
  • a surfactant is preferably used in the image recording layer in order to promote the on-machine developability at the start of printing and improve the coating surface shape.
  • Exemplary surfactants include nonionic surfactants, anionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, amphoteric surfactants and fluorochemical surfactants. Use may be made of a single surfactant or of a combination of two or more surfactants.
  • any known nonionic surfactant may be used without particular limitation.
  • Specific examples include polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ethers, polyoxyethylene polystyrylphenyl ethers, polyoxyethylene polyoxypropylene alkyl ethers, partial fatty acid esters of glycerol, partial fatty acid esters of sorbitan, partial fatty acid esters of pentaerythritol, fatty acid monoesters of propylene glycol, partial fatty acid esters of sucrose, partial fatty acid esters of polyoxyethylene sorbitan, partial fatty acid esters of polyoxyethylene sorbitol, fatty acid esters of polyethylene glycol, partial fatty acid esters of polyglycerol, polyoxyethylenated castor oils, partial fatty acid esters of polyoxyethylene glycerol, fatty acid diethanolamides, N,N-bis-2-hydroxyalkylamines, polyoxyethylene alkyl amines,
  • Any known anionic surfactant may be used without particular limitation.
  • Specific examples include fatty acid salts, abietic acid salts, hydroxyalkanesulfonates, alkanesulfonates, dialkylsulfosuccinates, linear alkylbenzenesulfonates, branched alkylbenzenesulfonates, alkylnaphthalenesulfonates, alkylphenoxypolyoxyethylene propylsulfonates, polyoxyethylene alkylsulfophenyl ether salts, sodium N-methyl-N-oleyltaurate, the disodium salts of N-alkylsulfosuccinic acid monoamides, petroleum sulfonates, sulfated tallow oil, sulfates of fatty acid alkyl esters, alkyl sulfates, polyoxyethylene alkyl ether sulfates, fatty acid monoglyceride sulfates, polyoxyethylene
  • Any known cationic surfactant may be used without particular limitation.
  • Examples include alkylamine salts, quaternary ammonium salts, polyoxyethylene alkylamine salts and polyethylene polyamine derivatives.
  • amphoteric surfactant Any known amphoteric surfactant may be used without particular limitation. Examples include carboxybetaines, aminocarboxylic acids, sulfobetaines, aminosulfates and imidazolines.
  • polyoxyethylene may be substituted with the more general term “polyoxyalkylene,” additional examples of which include polyoxymethylene, polyoxypropylene and polyoxybutylene. Surfactants containing these latter polyoxyalkylene groups can likewise be used in the present invention.
  • Fluorochemical surfactants having perfluoroalkyl groups in the molecule are also suitable as the surfactant.
  • fluorochemical surfactants examples include anionic surfactants such as perfluoroalkylcarboxylates, perfluoroalkylsulfonates and perfluoroalkylphosphates; amphoteric surfactants such as perfluoroalkylbetaine; cationic surfactants such as perfluoroalkyltrimethylammonium salts; and nonionic surfactants such as perfluoroalkylamine oxides, perfluoroalkyl-ethylene oxide adducts, oligomers containing perfluoroalkyl groups and hydrophilic groups, oligomers containing perfluoroalkyl groups and lipophilic groups, oligomers containing perfluoroalkyl groups, hydrophilic groups and lipophilic groups, and urethanes containing perfluoroalkyl groups and lipophilic groups.
  • Preferred examples include the fluorochemical surfactants mentioned in JP 62-170950 A , JP 62-226143 A and JP 60
  • Use may be made of a single surfactant or of a combination of two or more surfactants.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably from 0.001 to 10 wt% and more preferably from 0.01 to 5 wt% based on the total solids in the image recording layer.
  • various other compounds than those mentioned above may optionally be added to the image recording layer.
  • dyes having a large absorption in the visible light range can be used as image colorants.
  • Specific examples include Oil Yellow #101, Oil Yellow #103, oil Pink #312, Oil Green BG, Oil Blue BOS, Oil Blue #603, Oil Black BY, Oil Black BS and Oil Black T-505 (all of which are produced by Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.); and also Victoria Pure Blue, Crystal Violet (CI 42555), Methyl Violet (CI 42535), Ethyl Violet, Rhodamine B (CI 145170B), Malachite Green (CI 42000), Methylene Blue (CI 52015), and the dyes mentioned in JP 62-293247 A .
  • Preferred use can also be made of pigments such as phthalocyanine pigments, azo pigments, carbon black and titanium oxide.
  • the addition of these colorants is desirable because they enable image areas and non-image areas to be easily distinguished from each other following image formation.
  • the amount of colorant added to the image recording layer is 0.01 to 10 wt%, based on the total solids in the image recording layer.
  • an acid or radical-responsive chromogenic compound may be added to the image recording layer in order to form a print-out image.
  • Examples of compounds that may be effectively used include diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, thiazine, oxazine, xanthene, anthraquinone, iminoquinone, azo and azomethine dyes.
  • dyes such as Brilliant Green, Ethyl Violet, Methyl Green, Crystal Violet, Basic Fuchsin, Methyl Violet 2B, Quinaldine Red, Rose Bengal, Metanil Yellow, Thymolsulfophthalein, Xylenol Blue, Methyl Orange, Paramethyl Red, Congo Red, Benzopurpurin 4B, ⁇ -Naphthyl Red, Nile Blue 2B, Nile Blue A, Methyl Violet, Malachite Green, Parafuchsin, Victoria Pure Blue BOH (produced by Hodogaya Chemical Co., Ltd.), Oil Blue #603 (Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Oil Pink #312 (Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Oil Red 5B (Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Oil Scarlet #308 (Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Oil Red OG (Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Oil Red RR (Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Oil Green #502 (Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Spiron Red BEH Special (Hodogaya Chemical
  • leuco dyes known to be used in heat-sensitive or pressure-sensitive paper may also be advantageously used as a printing-out agent.
  • Specific examples include Crystal Violet Lactone, Malachite Green Lactone, Benzoyl Leucomethylene Blue, 2-(N-phenyl-N-methylamino)-6-(N-p-tolyl-N-ethyl)aminofluoran, 2-anilino-3-methyl-6-(N-ethyl-p-toluidino)fluoran, 3,6-dimethoxyfluoran, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-5-methyl-7-(N,N-dibenzylamino)fluoran, 3-(N-cyclohexyl-N-methylamino)-6-methyl-7-anilinofluoran, 3- (N,N-diethylamino) -6-methyl-7-anilinofluoran, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-6-methyl-7-anil
  • the acid or radical-responsive chromogenic dye is preferably added in an amount of 0.01 to 10 wt% based on the solids in the image recording layer.
  • thermal polymerization inhibitor examples include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis(3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), 2,2'-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol) and aluminum M-nitroso-N-phenylhydroxylamine.
  • the amount of thermal polymerization inhibitor added to the image recording layer is preferably from about 0.01 wt% to about 5 wt%, based on the total solids in the image recording layer.
  • a higher fatty acid derivative such as behenic acid or behenamide may be added to the image recording layer and induced to concentrate primarily at the surface of the image recording layer as the layer dries after coating.
  • the higher fatty acid derivative is preferably added to the image recording layer in an amount of about 0.1 wt% to about 10 wt%, based on the total solids in the image recording layer.
  • the image recording layer may contain a plasticizer in order to improved the on-machine developability.
  • plasticizer examples include phthalic acid esters such as dimethyl phthalate, diethyl phthalate, dibutyl phthalate, diisobutyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, octylcapryl phthalate, dicyclohexyl phthalate, ditridecyl phthalate, butylbenzyl phthalate, diisodecyl phthalate and diallyl phthalate; glycol esters such as dimethyl glycol phthalate, ethyl phthalyl ethyl glycolate, methyl phthalyl ethyl glycolate, butyl phthalyl butyl glycolate, and triethylene glycol dicaprylate; phosphoric acid esters such as tricresyl phosphate and triphenyl phosphate; dibasic fatty acid esters such as diisobutyl adipate, dioctyl adipate, dimethyl sebacate, dibutyl
  • the plasticizer content is preferably not more than about 30 wt%, based on the total solids in the image recording layer.
  • the image recording layer may contain fine inorganic particles to improve the strength of the cured film in image areas and the on-machine developability in non-image areas.
  • Preferred examples of fine inorganic particles include silica, alumina, magnesium oxide, titanium oxide, magnesium carbonate, calcium alginate, and mixtures thereof. Even if such particles do not convert light to heat, they can be used for such purposes as strengthening the film and strengthening interfacial adhesion due to surface roughening.
  • the fine inorganic particles have an average size of preferably 5 nm to 10. ⁇ m, and more preferably 0.5 ⁇ m to 3 ⁇ m. Within this range, they disperse stably in the image recording layer, enabling the image recording layer to maintain a sufficient degree of film strength and enabling the formation of non-image areas having excellent hydrophilic properties that are not prone to scumming during printing.
  • Fine inorganic particles of this type are readily available as commercial products, such as in the form of colloidal silica dispersions.
  • the content of these fine inorganic particles is preferably not more than 40 wt% and more preferably not more than 30 wt% based on the total solids in the image recording layer.
  • the image recording layer may contain a low-molecular-weight hydrophilic compound.
  • suitable low-molecular-weight hydrophilic compounds include the following water-soluble organic compounds: glycols such as ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, propylene glycol, dipropylene glycol and tripropylene glycol, as well as ether or ester derivatives thereof; polyhydroxy compounds such as glycerol and pentaerythritol; organic amines such as triethanolamine, diethanolamine and monoethanolamine, as well as salts thereof; organic sulfonic acids such as toluenesulfonic acid and benzenesulfonic acid, as well as salts thereof; organic phosphonic acids such as phenylphosphonic acid, as well as salts thereof; and organic carboxylic acids such as tartaric acid, oxalic acid, citric acid, malic acid, lactic acid, gluconic acid and amino acids, as well as salts thereof.
  • glycols such as ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, propylene glycol,
  • the image recording layer is formed by dispersing or dissolving the necessary ingredients described above in a solvent to prepare a coating fluid and applying the thus prepared coating fluid to the support.
  • a solvent include, but are not limited to, ethylene dichloride, cyclohexanone, methyl ethyl ketone, methanol, ethanol, propanol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 2-methoxyethyl acetate, 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, dimethoxyethane, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N,N-dimethylformamide, tetramethylurea, N-methylpyrrolidone, dimethylsulfoxide, sulfolane, ⁇ -butyrolactone, toluene and water.
  • the coating fluid has a solids concentration of preferably 1 to 50 wt%.
  • the image recording layer can also be formed by dispersing or dissolving the same or different ingredients in the same or different solvents to prepare a plurality of coating fluids, applying the prepared coating fluids a plurality of times, and repeatedly drying.
  • the image recording layer coating weight (solids content) on the support obtained after coating and drying varies depending on the intended application, although an amount of 0.3 to 3.0 g/m 2 is generally preferred. At an image recording layer coating weight within this range, a good sensitivity and good image recording layer film properties are obtained.
  • any of various coating methods may be used. Examples of suitable methods of coating include bar coating, spin coating, spray coating, curtain coating, dip coating, air knife coating, blade coating and roll coating.
  • the undercoat preferably contains a polymer having a substrate adsorbable group, a polymerizable group and a hydrophilic group.
  • An example of the polymer having a substrate adsorbable group, a polymerizable group and a hydrophilic group includes an undercoating polymer resin obtained by copolymerizing an adsorbable group-bearing monomer, a hydrophilic group-bearing monomer and a polymerizable reactive group (crosslinkable group)-bearing monomer.
  • One of the essential ingredients of the polymer resin is an adsorbable group on the substrate (the hydrophilic support surface). Whether or not a group is adsorbable on the hydrophilic support surface can be determined by, for example, the method as described below.
  • a test compound is dissolved in a readily-soluble solvent to prepare a coating solution, which is applied onto a support, then dried so as to obtain a coating weight after drying of 30 mg/m 2 .
  • the support onto which the test compound has been applied is thoroughly cleaned with a readily-soluble solvent, after which the amount of the test compound which is not removed by cleaning but remains on the support is measured and the amount of adsorption on the support is calculated.
  • the amount of remaining compound may be directly measured or calculated from the measured amount of the test compound dissolved in the cleaning solution.
  • the amount of the compound may be determined by, for example, fluorescent X-ray spectroscopy, absorbance measurement using reflectance spectroscopy or liquid chromatography.
  • the compound which is adsorbable on the support is a compound remaining in an amount of at least 1 mg/m 2 even after the above-described cleaning treatment has been carried out.
  • the group which is adsorbable on the surface of the hydrophilic support is a functional group that may form a chemical bond (e.g., an ionic bond, a hydrogen bond, a coordinate bond, or an intermolecular force bond) with a substance (e.g., a metal or a metal oxide) or a functional group (e.g., a hydroxy group) present on the surface of the hydrophilic surface.
  • the adsorbable group is preferably an acid radical or a cationic group.
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or an alkyl group of 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group of 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and most preferably a hydrogen atom or methyl. It is particularly preferred that R 2 and R 3 each represent a hydrogen atom.
  • Z is a functional group adsorbing on the surface of the hydrophilic support.
  • X is an oxygen atom (-O-) or an imino group (-NH-). X is more preferably an oxygen atom.
  • L is a divalent linking group.
  • L is preferably a divalent aliphatic group (alkylene group, substituted alkylene group, alkenylene group, substituted alkenylene group, alkynylene group, or substituted alkynylene group), a divalent aromatic group (allylene group or substituted allylene group), or a divalent heterocyclic group, or a combination of any of them with an oxygen atom (-O-), a sulfur atom (-S-), an imino group (-NH-), a substituted imino group (-NR- where R represents an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group) or a carbonyl group (-CO-).
  • the aliphatic group may have a cyclic structure or a branched structure.
  • the aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and most preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the aliphatic group is preferably a saturated aliphatic group rather than an unsaturated aliphatic group.
  • the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include halogen atoms, hydroxy group, aromatic groups and heterocyclic groups.
  • the aromatic group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and most preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include halogen atoms, hydroxy group, aliphatic groups, aromatic groups and heterocyclic groups.
  • the heterocyclic group preferably has a 5-membered or 6-membered ring as the heterocyclic ring.
  • the heterocyclic ring may be condensed with other heterocyclic ring, an aliphatic ring or an aromatic ring.
  • L is preferably a divalent linking group which includes a plurality of polyoxyalkylene structures and more preferably polyoxyethylene structures.
  • L preferably contains -(OCH 2 CH 2 ) n - (n is an integer of 2 or more).
  • Y is a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • the quaternary pyridinium group itself exhibits the adsorptive properties and therefore Z may not be a functional group adsorbing on the surface of the hydrophilic support but a hydrogen atom.
  • L represents a divalent linking group as defined in the formula (III) or a single bond.
  • the adsorbable functional group has been described above.
  • hydrophilic group of the undercoating polymer resin that may be preferably used include hydroxy, carboxy, carboxylate, hydroxyethyl, polyoxyethyl, hydroxypropyl, polyoxypropyl, amino, aminoethyl, aminopropyl, ammonium, amide, carboxymethyl, sulfonate and phosphate groups. Of these, a sulfonate group exhibiting high hydrophilicity is preferred.
  • Illustrative examples of the sulfonate group-containing monomer include sodium salts and amine salts of methallyloxybenzenesulfonic acid, allyloxybenzenesulfonic acid, arylsulfonic acid, vinylsulfonic acid, p-styrenesulfonic acid, methallylsulfonic acid, acrylamide t-butylsulfonic acid, 2-acrylamide-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid, and (3-acryloyloxypropyl)butylsulfonic acid.
  • a sodium salt of 2-acrylamide-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid is preferred in terms of hydrophilicity and handling in the synthesis.
  • the undercoating polymer resin preferably has a polymerizable reactive group.
  • the polymerizable reactive group serves to improve the adhesion to image areas. It is possible to introduce a crosslinkable functional group such as an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the polymer side chain or to form a salt structure with a compound that has an ethylenically unsaturated bond with a substituent which is opposite in charge to a polar substituent of the polymer resin so that the undercoating polymer resin may have crosslinking properties.
  • Examples of the monomer for introducing an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the side chain of the molecule include monomers of esters or amides of acrylic acid or methacrylic acid, in which the ester or amide residue (R in -COOR or -CONHR) has an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • the polymerizable reactive group content in the undercoating polymer resin is preferably 0.1 to 10.0 mmol, more preferably 1.0 to 7.0 mmol, and most preferably 2.0 to 5.5 mmol, per gram of the polymer resin.
  • a good storage stability is achieved while striking a good balance between the sensitivity and scumming resistance.
  • the undercoating polymer resin has a weight-average molecular weight of preferably at least 5,000, and more preferably from 10,000 to 300,000, and has a number-average molecular weight of preferably at least 1,000, and more preferably from 2,000 to 250,000.
  • the polydispersity is preferably from 1.1 to 10.
  • the undercoating polymer resin may be a random polymer, a block polymer or a graft polymer, but a random polymer is preferred.
  • the undercoating polymer resins may be used singly or as a mixture of two or more thereof.
  • the chelating agents may also be used singly or as a mixture of two or more thereof.
  • the undercoat-forming coating solution is obtained by dissolving the undercoating polymer resin and the chelating agent in an organic solvent (e.g., methanol, ethanol, acetone, or methyl ethyl ketone) and/or water.
  • the undercoat-forming coating solution may contain an infrared absorber.
  • undercoat-forming coating solution may be applied to the support.
  • suitable methods of coating include bar coating, spin coating, spray coating, curtain coating, dip coating, air knife coating, blade coating and roll coating.
  • the coating weight (solids content) of the undercoat is preferably from 0.1 to 100 mg/m 2 and more preferably from 1 to 50 mg/m 2 .
  • the image recording layer may optionally have a protective layer formed thereon to prevent scuffing and other damage to the image recording layer, to serve as an oxygen barrier, and to prevent ablation during exposure to a high-intensity laser.
  • the properties desired of the protective layer preferably include a low permeability of low-molecular-weight compounds such as oxygen, good transmittance of the light used for exposure, excellent adhesion to the image recording layer, and ready removal in the on-machine development step following exposure.
  • Materials that may be used in the protective layer include water-soluble polymeric compounds having a relatively good crystallinity.
  • Illustrative examples include water-soluble polymers such as polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyvinyl pyrrolidone, acidic celluloses, gelatin, gum arabic and polyacrylic acid.
  • PVA polyvinyl alcohol
  • polyvinyl pyrrolidone polyvinyl pyrrolidone
  • acidic celluloses such as gelatin, gum arabic and polyacrylic acid.
  • the polyvinyl alcohol includes unsubstituted vinyl alcohol units which provide the protective layer with the required oxygen barrier properties and water solubility, some of the vinyl alcohol units may be substituted with esters, ethers or acetals, and the layer may include also other copolymerizable components.
  • the polyvinyl alcohol prefferably be 71 to 100 mol% hydrolyzed and to have a degree of polymerization in a range of 300 to 2,400.
  • Specific examples of such polyvinyl alcohols include the following, all produced by Kuraray Co., Ltd.: PVA-105, PVA-110, PVA-117, PVA-117H, PVA-120, PVA-124, PVA-124H, PVA-CS, PVA-CST, PVA-HC, PVA-203, PVA-204, PVA-205, PVA-210, PVA-217, PVA-220, PVA-224, PVA-217EE, PVA-217E, PVA-220E, PVA-224E, PVA-405, PVA-420, PVA-613 and L-8.
  • Conditions such as the protective layer ingredients (choice of PVA, use of additives, etc.) and coating weight may be suitably selected after taking into consideration not only the oxygen barrier properties and the removability during development, but also other characteristics, including the antifogging properties, adhesion, and scratch resistance of the protective layer.
  • a higher percent hydrolysis of the PVA i.e., a higher content of unsubstituted vinyl alcohol units in the protective layer
  • a greater film thickness provide higher oxygen barrier properties, resulting in better sensitivity.
  • the oxygen barrier properties to be not too high.
  • an oxygen permeability A at 25°C and a pressure of not more than one atmosphere preferably satisfies 0.2 ⁇ A ⁇ 20 ml/m 2 ⁇ day.
  • the protective layer contains an inorganic layered compound as described in JP 11-38633 A .
  • a combination of the inorganic layered compound and the water-soluble polymeric compound enables high oxygen barrier properties to be achieved.
  • the inorganic layered compound that may be used in the invention is in the form of thin planar particles, and examples thereof include a mica group including a natural mica and a synthetic mica represented by the general formula: A(B,C) 2-5 D 4 O 10 (OH,F,O) 2 (wherein A is potassium, sodium or calcium, B and C are each iron (II), iron (III), manganese, aluminum, magnesium or vanadium, D is silicon or aluminum), talc represented by the formula: 3MgO ⁇ 4SiO ⁇ H 2 O, tainiolite, montmorillonite, saponite, hectorite, and zirconium phosphate.
  • Illustrative examples of the natural mica include muscovite, paragonite, phlogopite, biotite, and lepidolite.
  • Illustrative examples of the synthetic mica include non-swelling micas such as fluorophlogopite KMg 3 (AlSi 3 O 10 )F 2 , potassium tetrasilisic mica (KMg 2.5 Si 4 O 10 )F 2 ; and swelling micas such as sodium tetrasilisic mica NaMg 2.5 (Si 4 O 10 )F 2 , sodium or lithium tainiolite (Na,Li)Mg 2 Li(Si 4 O 10 )F 2 , and montmorillonite type sodium or lithium hectorite (Na,Li) 1/8 Mg 2/5 Li 1/8 (Si 4 O 10 )F 2 . Synthetic steatite is also useful.
  • non-swelling micas such as fluorophlogopite KMg 3 (AlSi 3 O 10 )F 2 , potassium tetrasilisic mica (KMg 2.5 Si 4 O 10 )F 2 ; and swelling micas such as sodium te
  • a fluorine-containing swelling mica which is a synthetic inorganic layered compound is particularly useful in the invention.
  • the inorganic layered compound that may be used in the invention desirably has such a shape that the thickness is as small as possible from the viewpoint of diffusion control and that the plane size is as large as possible so long as the smoothness of the coated surface and transmission of active rays are not impaired. Therefore, the aspect ratio is at least 20, preferably at least 100 and more preferably at least 200.
  • the aspect ratio is a ratio of the thickness to the major axis length of particles and can be measured from, for example, a projected image of a particle micrograph. A larger aspect ratio brings about a higher effect.
  • the inorganic layered compound that may be used in the invention has a particle size in terms of the average major axis length of 0.3 to 20 ⁇ m, preferably 0.5 to 10 ⁇ m, and more preferably 1 to 5 ⁇ m.
  • the particles have an average thickness of up to 0.1 ⁇ m, preferably up to 0.05 ⁇ m, and more preferably up to 0.01 ⁇ m.
  • a swelling synthetic mica which is a typical one of the inorganic layered compounds has a thickness of about 1 to about 50 nm and a plane size of about 1 to about 20 ⁇ m.
  • the content of the inorganic layered compound in the protective layer is preferably from 5 wt% to 55 wt%, and more preferably from 10 wt% to 40 wt% based on the total solids in the protective layer.
  • a high resistance to adhesion is achieved at a content of 5 wt% or more and a good coatability and a high sensitivity are achieved at a content of 55 wt% or less.
  • the total content of the inorganic layered compounds used preferably falls within the above-defined wt% range.
  • the inorganic layered compound that may be used in the protective layer is dispersed, for example, by the following procedure. From 5 to 10 parts by weight of a swelling layered compound which is illustrated as a preferable inorganic layered compound is first added to 100 parts by weight of water, then fully blended with water and swelled, after which the resulting mixture is dispersed using a dispersing machine.
  • the dispersing machine used include, for example, a variety of mills in which mechanical power is directly applied to carry out dispersion, a high-speed agitation type dispersing machine having a large shear force and a dispersing machine providing high-intensity ultrasonic energy.
  • Specific examples thereof include a ball mill, a sand grinder mill, a visco mill, a colloid mill, a homogenizer, a dissolver, a polytron, a homomixer, a homoblender, a keddy mill, a jet agitor, a capillary emulsifier, a liquid siren, an electromagnetic strain type ultrasonic generator and an emulsifier having a Polman whistle.
  • the dispersion containing 5 to 10 wt% of the inorganic layered compound thus prepared is highly viscous or in the form of a gel and exhibits extremely good storage stability.
  • the dispersion be diluted with water, thoroughly stirred and then blended with a binder solution to prepare the coating fluid.
  • Flexibility may be imparted to the protective layer by adding, for example, glycerin or dipropylene glycol to the composition making up the protective layer in an amount of several wt% with respect to the water-soluble polymeric compound.
  • anionic surfactants such as sodium alkylsulfate and sodium alkylsulfonate
  • amphoteric surfactants such as alkylaminocarboxylate and alkylaminodicarbonylate
  • nonionic surfactants such as polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ether may be added in an amount of several wt% with respect to the (co)polymer.
  • the protective film has a film thickness of preferably 0.1 to 5 ⁇ m, and more preferably 0.2 to 2 ⁇ m.
  • JP 49-70702 A mentions that sufficient adhesion can be achieved by mixing 20 to 60 wt% of an acrylic emulsion or a water-insoluble vinyl pyrrolidone-vinyl acetate copolymer into a hydrophilic polymer composed primarily of polyvinyl alcohol, and laminating the resulting mixture onto the image recording layer.
  • the thus prepared protective layer-forming coating fluid is applied onto the image recording layer provided on the support and dried to form the protective layer.
  • the coating solvent may be selected as appropriate in connection with the binder, but distilled water and purified water are preferably used in cases where a water-soluble polymer is employed. No particular limitation is imposed on the method of forming the protective layer but any known methods such as those described in US 3,458,311 and JP 55-49729 B may be applied. Examples of suitable methods of coating include blade coating, air knife coating, gravure coating, roll coating, spray coating, dip coating and bar coating.
  • the protective layer preferably has a coating weight after drying of 0.01 to 10 g/m 2 , more preferably 0.02 to 3 g/m 2 and even more preferably 0.02 to 1 g/m 2 .
  • a colorant e.g., a water-soluble dye
  • a colorant which has an excellent transmittance of the infrared light used for exposure and can efficiently absorb light of other wavelengths
  • the amenability of the presensitized plate to handling under a safelight can be improved without lowering the sensitivity.
  • the presensitized plate of the invention provided with such an image recording layer uses the aluminum alloy plate and the lithographic printing plate support of the invention and is therefore rendered into a lithographic printing plate having an excellent resistance to spotting by carrying out a development process.
  • This aluminum alloy plate was used to check the contents of trace amount components and as a result it was revealed that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.12 wt%, 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.01 wt%, respectively.
  • This aluminum alloy plate was used to check the contents of trace amount components and as a result it was revealed that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.05 wt%, 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.01 wt%, respectively.
  • This aluminum alloy plate was used to check the contents of trace amount components and as a result it was revealed that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.14 wt%, 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.013 wt%, respectively.
  • the iron content was 0.09 wt%.
  • the step in (3) and the subsequent steps were performed in the same manner as in Example 3 to prepare an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate support with a thickness of 0.3 mm, a width of 1030 mm and a weight of about 5 tons.
  • This aluminum alloy plate was used to check the contents of trace amount components and as a result it was revealed that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.11 wt%, 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.01 wt%, respectively.
  • This aluminum alloy plate was used to check the contents of trace amount components and as a result it was revealed that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.12 wt%, 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.01 wt%, respectively.
  • This aluminum alloy plate was used to check the contents of trace amount components and as a result it was revealed that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.12 wt%, 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.01 wt%, respectively.
  • This aluminum alloy plate was used to check the contents of trace amount components and as a result it was revealed that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.32 wt%, 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.01 wt%, respectively.
  • Example 1 was repeated except that the plate was rolled to a thickness of 2.3 mm by hot rolling (temperature at the end of hot rolling: about 310°C), thereby preparing an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate support.
  • An aluminum melt prepared so as to contain 0.09 wt% of iron, 0.09 wt% of silicon and 0.010 wt% of copper was used to prepare a cast plate with a plate thickness of 6 mm by continuous casting and rolling.
  • the plate was rolled to a thickness of 2.5 mm by cold rolling and rolled to a thickness of 0.3 mm by intermediate annealing under the conditions of maintaining the plate at 450°C for 0.4 second, heating it at an average temperature rise rate of 700°C/s and cooling it at an average temperature falling rate of 750°C/s so that the draft at the time of the final cold rolling was 88%.
  • An aluminum melt prepared so as to contain 0.04 wt% of iron, 0.10 wt% of silicon and 0.009 wt% of copper was used to prepare a cast plate with a plate thickness of 6 mm by continuous casting and rolling.
  • the plate was rolled to a thickness of 2.5 mm by cold rolling and rolled to a thickness of 0.3 mm by intermediate annealing under the conditions of maintaining the plate at 450°C for 0.4 second, heating it at an average temperature rise rate of 1000°C/s and cooking it at an average temperature falling rate of 1000°C/s so that the draft at the time of the final cold rolling was 88%.
  • FIG. 3 shows an aluminum alloy plate 1, roller-type brushes (bristle bundle brushes in Examples) 2 and 4, an abrasive-containing slurry 3, and support rollers 5, 6, 7 and 8.
  • the bristle bundle brushes were made of nylon 6/10 and had a bristle diameter of 0.3 mm and a bristle length of 50 mm.
  • Each brush was constructed of a 300 mm diameter stainless steel cylinder in which holes had been formed and bristles densely set.
  • Two support rollers 200 mm diameter were provided below each bristle bundle brush and spaced 300 mm apart.
  • the bundle bristle brushes were pressed against the aluminum alloy plate until the load on the driving motor that rotates the brushes was 10 kW greater than before the bundle bristle brushes were pressed against the plate.
  • the direction in which the brushes were rotated was the same as the direction in which the aluminum plate was moved.
  • Etching treatment was carried out by using a spray line to spray the aluminum alloy plate obtained as described above with an aqueous solution having a sodium hydroxide concentration of 26 wt%, an aluminum ion concentration of 6.5 wt%, and a temperature of 70°C. The plate was then rinsed by spraying with water. The amount of dissolved aluminum was 10 g/m 2 .
  • desmutting treatment was carried out in an aqueous nitric acid solution.
  • the nitric acid wastewater from the subsequent electrochemical graining treatment step was used for the aqueous nitric acid solution in desmutting treatment.
  • the solution temperature was 35°C.
  • Desmutting treatment was carried out by spraying the plate with the desmutting solution for 3 seconds.
  • Electrochemical graining treatment was consecutively carried out by nitric acid electrolysis using a 60 Hz AC voltage.
  • Aluminum nitrate was added to an aqueous solution containing 10.4 g/L of nitric acid at a temperature of 35°C to prepare an electrolytic solution having an adjusted aluminum ion concentration of 4.5 g/L, and the electrolytic solution was used in electrochemical graining treatment.
  • Electrochemical graining treatment was carried out for a period of time TP until the current reached a peak from zero of 0.8 ms, at a duty ratio of 1:1, using an alternating current having a trapezoidal waveform shown in FIG. 1 , with a carbon electrode as the counter electrode.
  • a ferrite was used for the auxiliary anodes.
  • An electrolytic cell of the type shown in FIG. 2 was used.
  • the current density at the current peak was 30 A/dm 2 .
  • 5% was diverted to the auxiliary anodes.
  • the amount of electricity (C/dm 2 ) which is the total amount of electricity when the aluminum alloy plate serves as an anode, was 185 C/dm 2 .
  • the plate was then rinsed by spraying with water.
  • Etching treatment was carried out by using a spray line to spray the aluminum alloy plate obtained as described above with an aqueous solution having a sodium hydroxide concentration of 5 wt%, an aluminum ion concentration of 0.5 wt%, and a temperature of 50°C. The plate was then rinsed by spraying with water. The amount of dissolved aluminum was 0.5 g/m 2 .
  • Desmutting treatment was carried out in an aqueous sulfuric acid solution.
  • the aqueous sulfuric acid solution used in Desmutting treatment was a solution having a sulfuric acid concentration of 300 g/L and an aluminum ion concentration of 5 g/L.
  • the solution temperature was 60°C.
  • Desmutting treatment was carried out by spraying the plate with the desmutting solution for 3 seconds.
  • Electrochemical graining treatment was consecutively carried out by hydrochloric acid electrolysis using a 60 Hz AC voltage.
  • Aluminum chloride was added to an aqueous solution containing 6.2 g/L of hydrochloric acid at a temperature of 33°C to prepare an electrolytic solution having an adjusted aluminum ion concentration of 4.5 g/L, and the electrolytic solution was used in electrochemical graining treatment.
  • Electrochemical graining treatment was carried out for a period of time TP until the current reached a peak from zero of 0.8 ms, at a duty ratio of 1:1, using an alternating current having a trapezoidal waveform shown in FIG. 1 , with a carbon electrode as the counter electrode.
  • a ferrite was used for the auxiliary anodes.
  • An electrolytic cell of the type shown in FIG. 2 was used.
  • the current density at the current peak was 25 A/dm 2 .
  • Etching treatment was carried out by using a spray line to spray the aluminum alloy plate obtained as described above with an aqueous solution having a sodium hydroxide concentration of 5 wt%, an aluminum ion concentration of 0.5 wt%, and a temperature of 50°C. The plate was then rinsed by spraying with water. The amount of dissolved aluminum was 0.1 g/m 2 ,
  • wastewater generated in the anodizing treatment step aqueous solution containing 170 g/L of sulfuric acid and 5 g/L of aluminum ions dissolved therein
  • Desmutting treatment was used to carry out Desmutting treatment at a solution temperature of 35°C for 4 seconds.
  • Anodizing treatment was carried out by DC electrolysis using an anodizing apparatus of the structure as shown in FIG, 4 to obtain a lithographic printing plate support.
  • Sulfuric acid was used for the electrolytic solution for supplying to a first and a second electrolysis portion.
  • Each electrolytic solution contained 170 g/L of sulfuric acid and 5 g/L of aluminum ions.
  • Anodizing treatment was carried out by DC electrolysis at an average current density of 20 A/dm 2 so that an anodized film having a coating weight of 2.7 g/m 2 could be formed.
  • the solution temperature was 40°C, the voltage was 5 to 30 V and the time was 10 seconds.
  • silicate treatment was carried out by dipping the plate into an aqueous solution containing 2.5 wt% of No. 3 sodium silicate at 70°C for 7 seconds.
  • the amount of deposited silicon was 10 mg/m 2 .
  • the plate was then rinsed by spraying with water.
  • an image recording layer-forming coating fluid was applied onto the thus formed undercoat by bar coating and dried in an oven at 100°C for 60 seconds to form an image recording layer having a coating weight after drying of 1.3 g/m 2 .
  • the image recording layer-forming coating fluid was obtained by mixing with stirring then photosensitive solution and microgel fluid shown below just before use in application.
  • Binder polymer (1) 0.24 g * Infrared absorber (1) 0.030 g * Radical polymerization initiator (1) 0.162 g * Polymerizable compound, tris(acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate (NK ester A-9300 available from Shin-nakamura Chemical Corporation) 0.192 g * Low-molecular-weight hydrophilic compound, tris(2-hydroxyethyl)isocyanurate 0.062 g * Low-molecular-weight hydrophilic compound (1) [structure shown below] 0.052 g * Sensitizer Phosphonium compound (1) [structure shown below] 0.055 g * Sensitizer Benzyl-dimethyl-octyl ammonium ⁇ PF 6 salt 0.018 g * Betaine derivative 0.010 g * Fluorochemical surfactant (1) [structure shown below] 0.008 g * Methyl ethyl ketone 1.091 g * 1-Methoxy-2-propanol 8.609 g
  • the binder polymer (1), the infrared absorber (1), the radical polymerization initiator (1), the phosphonium compound (1), the low-molecular-weight hydrophilic compound (1) and the fluorochemical surfactant (1) have the structures represented by the following formulas:
  • the microgel (1) was synthesized by the following procedure.
  • oil phase component 10g of an adduct of trimethylolpropane with xylene diisocyanate (Takenate D-110N available from Mitsui Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd.), 3.15 g of pentaerythritol triacrylate (SR444 available from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and 0.1 g of Pionin A-41C (available from Takemoto Oil & Fat Co., Ltd.) were dissolved in 17 g of ethyl acetate.
  • aqueous phase component 40 g of a 4 wt% aqueous solution of PVA-205 was prepared.
  • the oil phase component and the aqueous phase component were mixed and emulsified in a homogenizer at 12,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
  • the resulting emulsion was added to 25 g of distilled water and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes, then at 50°C for 3 hours.
  • the thus obtained microgel fluid was diluted with distilled water so as to have a solids concentration of 15 wt% and used as the microgel (1).
  • the average particle size of the microgel as measured by a light scattering method was 0.2 ⁇ m.
  • a protective layer-forming coating fluid of the composition indicated below was applied onto the thus formed image recording layer by bar coating and dried in an oven at 120°C for 60 seconds to form a protective layer having a coating weight after drying of 0.15 g/m 2 , thereby obtaining a presensitized plate.
  • the dispersion of the inorganic layered compound (1) was prepared by the following procedure.
  • the resulting presensitized plate was conditioned with a slip sheet at 25°C and 70% RH for 1 hour, wrapped with aluminum kraft paper and heated in an oven set at 60°C for 5 days.
  • the 500th print was visually checked and the number of print stains having a size of at least 20 ⁇ m per 100 cm 2 was counted. The results are shown in Table 2.
  • the presensitized plate can be evaluated as having a good resistance to severe scumming.
  • a specimen with a width of 25 mm and a length of 150 mm was prepared from the resulting presensitized plate and measured for the tensile strength in the rolling direction using AUTOGRAPH (trade name) manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation.
  • Measurement was made three times under such a condition that the tensile rate was 2 nm/min and the average of the three measurements was calculated.
  • a specimen with a tensile strength of at least 150 N/mm 2 can be rated as excellent in tensile strength.
  • Table 1 Number of printing stains with a size of at least 20 ⁇ m per 100 cm 2
  • Tensile strength (N/mm 2 ) Example 1 150 155 Example 2 50 150
  • Example 5 150 Example 6
  • Example 7 150
  • Table 1 reveals that a lithographic printing plate having an excellent resistance to spotting can be obtained by using an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate which is obtained by carrying out semicontinuous casting for forming an ingot in which iron is incorporated in an amount of not more than a specified value and cold rolling at a total draft exceeding a specified value.

Abstract

A method of manufacturing an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate includes a semicontinuous casting step for forming an ingot containing up to 0.15 wt% of iron from an aluminum alloy melt, a scalping step for scalping the ingot formed in the semicontinuous casting step to render the ingot into a plate form, a hot rolling step for rolling the ingot in the plate form following the scalping step to obtain a rolled plate, and a cold rolling step in which the rolled plate following the hot rolling step is subjected to cold rolling at a total draft exceeding 88% to obtain an aluminum alloy plate with a thickness of at least 0.1 mm. A lithographic printing plate having an excellent resistance to spotting is obtained.

Description

    BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention relates to an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate and its manufacturing method, as well as a lithographic printing plate support and a presensitized plate using the same.
  • A large number of researches have been made for the computer-to-plate (CTP) system on which significant progress has been made recently- Among others, in order to solve the problem of wastewater treatment while achieving further step rationalization, researches have been made on a presensitized plate that can be directly mounted on a printing press without any development process after light exposure and be used in printing, and various methods; have been proposed therefor.
  • One of the methods for eliminating a treatment step is a method called "on-machine development" in which an exposed presensitized plate is mounted on a plate cylinder of a printing press and fountain solution and ink are supplied as the plate cylinder is rotated to thereby remove non-image areas of the presensitized plate. In other words, this is a system in which the presensitized plate following exposure is mounted on the printing press without any further treatment so that development completes in the usual printing process. The presensitized plate suitable for use in such on-machine development is required to have an image recording layer which is soluble in fountain solution or an ink solvent and to have a light-room handling property capable of development on a printing press placed in a light room.
  • For instance, JP 2938397 B describes a presensitized plate having a hydrophilic support provided thereon a photosensitive layer containing fine particles of a thermoplastic hydrophobic polymer dispersed in a hydrophilic binder polymer. JP 2938397 B describes that the plate can be mounted on a plate cylinder of a printing press to remove unexposed areas using fountain solution and/or ink (on-machine development can be made) after an image has been formed by exposing the presensitized plate with a laser beam to coalesce together the thermoplastic hydrophobic polymer particles in the image recording layer by heat. The presensitized plate is photosensitive to the infrared region and therefore also has a light-room handling property.
  • JP 2001-293971 A describes that a presensitized plate having an image recording layer which contains a thermoplastic particulate polymer and at least one of a particulate polymer having a heat-reactive group and a microcapsule containing a compound having a heat-reactive group has a good on-machine developability, a high sensitivity and a long press life.
  • However, in cases where the presensitized plates described in JP 2938397 B and JP 2001-293971 A were stored for a long period of time, ink was prone to adhere to part of the non-image area surface, causing dot- or ring-shaped stains on printed paper. This defect is also hereinafter referred to as "spotting".
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The inventors of the invention have made an intensive study on why such spotting occurred and focused attention on the fact that the image recording layer provided in the so-called on-machine development type presensitized plates described in JP 2338397 B and JP 2001-293971 A can be removed by printing ink and/or fountain solution and therefore contains a large amount of hydrophilic components, as a result of which the image recording layer is likely to be receptive to moisture under the influence of ambient air. It has been revealed that, in the so-called on-machine development type presensitized plates described in JP 2938397 B and JP 2001-293971 A , the image recording layer contains moisture under the influence of ambient air and also hydrophilic components anionized by the moisture (hereinafter preferred to simply as "anions") to cause corrosion and therefore spotting on an aluminum alloy plate.
  • The inventors also revealed that, of those anions, presence of anions comprising halide ions and/or PF6 - is prone to cause corrosion of the aluminum alloy plate,
  • In connection with the method of manufacturing an aluminum alloy plate, commonly assigned JP 7-81260 A proposes a lithographic printing plate support manufacturing method which involves melting an aluminum material containing at least 99.7% of aluminum to prepare an ingot, scalping the ingot, subjecting the scalped ingot to cold rolling to reduce the thickness to 0.5 to 0.1 mm, correcting the rolled plate to obtain an aluminium support, and graining the aluminum support.
  • In addition, commonly assigned JP 8-209313 A proposes a method of manufacturing an aluminum alloy plate support for a lithographic printing plate characterized in that an aluminum alloy melt containing 0.05 to 1,0 wt% of iron, up to 1.0 wt% of silicon, and up to 0.2 wt% of cupper, with the balance being aluminum and inadvertent impurities is continuously cast and rolled to obtain a strip-shaped cast plate with a thickness of 25 mm or less, which is then subjected to at least one cold rolling treatment to obtain a rolled plate having a desired thickness with the final cold rolling treatment being carried out at a draft of at least 30%, and in the cold rolling process is carried out at least one annealing treatment that involves heating the rolled plate to a temperature range of 350 to 620°C at a temperature rise rate of at least 50°C/min, maintaining it in the temperature range for not more than 10 minutes, and cooling it to a temperature range of 150°C or less at a temperature falling rate of at least 50°C/min.
  • However, these patent documents do not mention application to the CTP system or an on-machine development type presensitized plate.
  • A first object of the invention is to provide an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate capable of obtaining a lithographic printing plate having an excellent resistance to spotting. A second object of the invention is to provide a method of manufacturing such aluminum alloy plate. A third object of the invention is to provide a lithographic printing plate support obtained by using such aluminum alloy plate. A fourth object of the invention is to provide a presensitized plate and in particular an on-machine developable presensitized plate obtained by using such lithographic printing plate support.
  • The inventors of the invention have made intensive studies to achieve the above-described objects and as a result found that a lithographic printing plate having an excellent resistance to spotting can be obtained by using an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate which is obtained by carrying out semicontinuous casting for forming an ingot in which iron is incorporated in an amount of not more than a specified value and cold rolling at a total draft exceeding a specified value. The invention has been completed based on this finding.
  • Specifically, the invention provides the following (1) to (8).
    1. (1) A method of manufacturing an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate comprising:
      • a semicontinuous casting step for forming an ingot containing up to 0.15 wt% of iron from an aluminum alloy melt;
      • a scalping step for scalping the ingot formed in the semicontinuous casting step to render the ingot into a plate form;
      • a hot rolling step for rolling the ingot in the plate form following the scalping step to obtain a rolled plate; and
      • a cold rolling step in which the rolled plate following the hot rolling step is subjected to cold rolling under the conditions of a total draft exceeding 88% to obtain an aluminum alloy plate with a thickness of at least 0.1 mm,
    2. (2) The method of manufacturing the aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate according to (1) above, wherein the aluminum alloy melt is a melt obtained by adding at least 50 wt% of an aluminum material containing up to 0.08 wt% of iron to a melt containing less than 0.5 wt% of iron and melting the aluminum material.
    3. (3) An aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate obtained by the method according to (1) or (2) above.
    4. (4) A lithographic printing plate support obtained by subjecting a surface of the aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate according to (3) above to a surface roughening treatment including an electrochemical graining treatment and an anodizing treatment in this order.
    5. (5) The lithographic printing plate support according to (4) above, wherein the lithographic printing plate support is obtained by further subjecting the aluminum alloy plate following the anodizing treatment to a hydrophilizing treatment which is a treatment using an alkali metal silicate so that silicon is adsorbed in an amount of 1.0 to 30 mg/m2.
    6. (6) A presensitized plate having an image recording layer formed on the lithographic printing plate support according to (4) or (5) above.
    7. (7) The presensitized plate according to (6) above, wherein the image recording layer contains anions comprising halide ions and/or PF6 -.
    8. (8) The presensitized plate according to (6) or (7) above, wherein the image recording layer is one in which an image is formed by light exposure and unexposed portions are removable with printing ink and/or fountain solution.
  • As will be described later, the invention can provide an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate capable of obtaining a lithographic printing plate having an excellent resistance to spotting, a method of manufacturing such aluminum alloy plate, a lithographic printing plate support obtained by using such aluminum alloy plate, as well as a presensitized plate and in particular an on-machine developable presensitized pilate obtained by using such lithographic printing plate support.
  • The invention can provide a lithographic printing plate having an excellent resistance to spotting irrespective of the anion concentration (halide ion concentration, PF6 - concentration) of the image recording layer and is therefore useful.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
    • FIG. 1 is a graph showing an example of an alternating current waveform that may be used to carry out electrochemical graining treatment in a method of manufacturing a lithographic printing plate support of the invention.
    • FIG. 2 is a side view of a radial electrolytic cell that may be used in electrochemical graining treatment with alternating current in the method of manufacturing the lithographic printing plate support of the invention.
    • FIG. 3 is a side view illustrating the concept of a brush graining step that may be used to carry out mechanical graining treatment in the manufacture of the lithographic printing plate support of the invention.
    • FIG. 4 is a schematic view of an anodizing apparatus that may be used to carry out anodizing treatment in the manufacture of the lithographic printing plate support of the invention.
    DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • The invention is described in detail below.
  • [Lithographic Printing Plate Support] [Method of Manufacturing Aluminum Alloy Plate]
  • An aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate obtained by the method of manufacturing an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate of the invention to be described latter (hereinafter also referred to as the "aluminum alloy plate manufacturing method of the invention") is used for the lithographic printing plate support of the invention. The resulting aluminum alloy plate is hereinafter referred to as the "aluminum alloy plate of the invention".
  • The aluminum alloy plate manufacturing method of the invention is a manufacturing method which includes a semicontinuous casting step in which an ingot with an iron content of up to 0.15 wt% is formed from an aluminum alloy melt; a scalping step in which the ingot formed in the semicontinuous casting step is rendered into a plate form by scalping; a hot rolling step in which the ingot in the plate form following the scalping step is rolled to obtain a rolled plate; and a cold rolling step in which the rolled plate following the hot rolling step is subjected to cold rolling at a total draft exceeding 88% to obtain an aluminum alloy plate with a thickness of 0.1 nm or more.
  • Next, the semicontinuous casting step, scalping step, hot rolling step and cold rolling step as well as various other treatments that may be performed as desired are described in detail.
  • (Cleaning Treatment)
  • First, an aluminum alloy melt that has been adjusted to a given alloying ingredient content can be optionally subjected to cleaning treatment by an ordinary method.
  • Cleaning treatment is carried out, for example, by degassing treatment for removing hydrogen and other unwanted gases from the melt (e.g., flux treatment using argon gas, chlorine gas or the like); filtering treatment using, for example, what is referred to as a rigid media filter (e.g., ceramic tube filter, ceramic foam filter), a filter that employs alumina flakes, alumina balls or the like as the filter medium, or a glass cloth filter; or a combination of degassing treatment and filtering treatment.
  • In the practice of the invention, it is preferable to select an aluminum material whose iron content is lower than the aluminum material with an aluminum purity of at least 99.7% (grade: P1020 containing such impurities as 0.18 wt% of iron, 0.06 wt% of silicon, 0.005 wt% of titanium, 0.012 wt% of gallium 0.006 wt% of vanadium, and 0.003 wt% of copper) and melting the thus selected aluminum material, because the iron content of the ingot to be formed in the semicontinuous casting step to be described later and that of the aluminum alloy plate of the invention are adjusted to 0.15 wt% or less.
  • For the same reason as above, it is more preferable to select an aluminum material with a low iron content and to melt the selected aluminum material after a melt remaining in the melting furnace has been thoroughly removed.
  • In the practice of the invention, it is even more preferable to use a melt of an aluminum material with an iron content of 0.08% or less not only for the reason that the iron content of the ingot to be formed in the semicontinuous casting step to be described later and that of the aluminum alloy plate of the invention are adjusted to 0.15 wt% or less but also for the reason that consistent manufacture at a low cost is possible without the necessity of removing a melt remaining in the melting furnace.
  • Specifically, it is preferable for at least 50 wt% of an aluminum material with an iron content of 0.08% or less to be added to the aluminum melt in the melting furnace (remaining melt) and melted. In this process, it is more preferable for the content of the remaining melt to be from 10 to 50 wt% and even more preferably from 10 to 20 wt%.
  • The remaining melt in the melting furnace preferably contains less than 0.5% of iron for the reason that the iron content of the ingot to be formed in the semicontinuous casting step to be described later is readily adjusted to 0.15 wt% or less.
  • For example, a commercial product with an aluminum purity of at least 99.85% (grade: P0608 containing such impurities as 0.07 wt% of iron, 0.03 wt% of silicon, 0.003 wt% of titanium and approximately 0 wt% of copper) may be used for such aluminum material with an iron content of 0.08% or less.
  • In addition, in cases where the iron content of the ingot to be formed in the semicontinuous casting step to be described below and that of the aluminum alloy plate of the invention are to be further reduced to, for example, less than 0.05%, the aluminum alloy melt is preferably obtained by melting an aluminum material with an aluminum purity of 99.99% containing such impurities as 0.003 wt% of iron, 0.001 wt% of silicon, 0.000 wt% of titanium, and 0.001 wt% of copper.
  • (Semicontinuous Casting Step)
  • The semicontinuous casting step is a step in which an ingot containing up to 0.15 wt% of iron is formed from the aluminum alloy melt having undergone the above-described cleaning treatment as desired.
  • In the practice of the invention, any of the various aluminum alloy melts illustrated above may be subjected to semicontinuous casting to form an ingot with an iron content of up to 0.15 wt%.
  • Specifically, for example, a stationary mold may be used to prepare an ingot having a desired plate thickness (e.g., 300 to 800 mm).
  • By adjusting the iron content of the ingot formed in the semicontinuous casting step to 0.15 wt% or less, the iron content of the resulting aluminum alloy plate of the invention is also adjusted to 0.15 wt% or less, thus enabling a lithographic printing plate with an excellent resistance to spotting to be obtained.
  • This is based on the novel finding that the presence of iron induces the corrosion of the aluminum alloy plate which may occur, as described above, due to moisture included in the image recording layer under the influence of ambient air and the presence of anions, in cases where the image recording layer contains a large amount of hydrophilic components.
  • (Scalping Step)
  • The scalping step is a step in which the ingot formed in the semicontinuous casting step is rendered into a plate form by scalping.
  • In the invention, a nonuniform portion can be removed from the surface layer to obtain an aluminum alloy plate with a desired plate thickness by scalping, for example, a 1 to 30 mm thick portion and preferably 1 to 10 mm thick portion of the surface layer of the ingot by an ordinary method.
  • (Heating Treatment)
  • In the practice of the invention, the aluminum alloy plate obtained by the scalping step is preferably heated in a heating furnace to a hot rolling starting temperature or higher before being subjected to the hot rolling step to be described later.
  • (Soaking Treatment)
  • In the invention, it is preferable to further carry out soaking treatment for keeping the aluminum alloy plate at a predetermined temperature for a predetermined, period of time between the heating treatment carried out as desired and the hot rolling step to be described later.
  • Soaking treatment is preferably carried out at a temperature at which iron-containing intermetallic compounds are not transferred to the stable phase. By carrying out soaking treatment at such a temperature, the iron-containing intermetallic compounds which may cause corrosion (become starting points of corrosion) have a metastable phase, whereby the presensitized plate of the invention obtained by using the resulting aluminum alloy plate of the invention has an improved resistance to spotting.
  • A temperature known in a literature may be applied as the temperature at which the intermetallic compounds are not transferred to the stable phase, but to be more specific the temperature is preferably in a range of less than 550°C, more preferably 500 to 540°C, and even more preferably 510 to 540°C.
  • Soaking treatment is preferably carried out for up to 30 hours in terms of further reducing transition of the iron-containing intermetallic compounds to the stable phase, and for at least 1 hour in terms of making the temperature of the whole slab uniform.
  • In the invention., α-AlFeSi, β-AlFeSi and Al6Fe are iron-containing metastable intermetallic compounds known in literatures. Likewise, Al3Fe is a stable intermetallic compound.
  • In other words, in the practice of the invention, α-AlFeSi, β-AlFeSi and Al6Fe are desirable iron-containing intermetallic compounds, whereas Al3Fe is not desirable.
  • (Hot Rolling Step)
  • The hot rolling step is a step in which the ingot in the plate form as obtained by the scalping step is rolled to obtain a rolled plate with a reduced plate thickness, with the soaking treatment being optionally carried out between the scalping step and the hot rolling step.
  • No particular limitation is imposed on the rolling conditions in hot rolling treatment, but the aluminum alloy plate is preferably rolled to a plate thickness of not more than 10 mm, more preferably from 2.6 to 7.0 mm and even more preferably from 3.0 to 5.0 mm.
  • In the practice of the invention, since the iron content is as low as 0.15 wt% or less, it is particularly preferable for hot rolling treatment to be followed by self-recrystallization instead of annealing to be described later in order to minimize reduction of the mechanical strength (in particular tensile strength) of the resulting aluminum alloy plate.
  • In order for hot rolling to be followed by self-recrystallization, the temperature at the end of hot rolling is preferably equal to or higher than the recrystallization temperature (270°C) and more preferably equal to or higher than 290°C.
  • In terms of preventing the surface quality following surface roughening treatment to be described later from being lowered while suppressing coarsening of recrystallized grains, the temperature at the end of hot rolling is preferably up to 350°C and more preferably up to 340°C.
  • (Annealing)
  • In the practice of the invention, annealing may be carried out before or after cold rolling, or even during cold rolling to be described later, but as described above, the plate following the hot rolling step is preferably self-recrystallized instead of annealing.
  • Specifically, the annealing conditions may consist of 2 to 20 hours of heating at 280 to 600°C, and preferably 2 to 10 hours of heating at 350 to 500°C, in a batch-type annealing furnace, or of continuously heating for several tens of seconds to several minutes at 450°C or more, in a continuous annealing furnace.
  • (Cold Rolling Step)
  • The cold rolling step is a step in which the rolled plate following the hot rolling step is subjected to cold rolling at a total draft exceeding 88% to obtain an aluminum alloy plate with a thickness of at least 0.1 mm.
  • The total draft in the cold rolling step is represented by the following expression: Total draft % = plate thickness at the start of cold rolling - plate thickness following cold rolling / plate thickness at the start of cold rolling × 100
    Figure imgb0001
  • In the practice of the invention, the above-described cold rolling enables a lithographic printing plate with an excellent resistance to spotting to be obtained while ensuring the mechanical strength of the resulting aluminum alloy plate of the invention.
  • As described above, the iron content of the resulting aluminum alloy plate of the invention is adjusted to 0.15 wt% or less so that a lithographic printing plate with an excellent resistance to spotting can be obtained. The mechanical strength usually decreases at a lower iron content but it is considered that the mechanical strength can be maintained by setting the total draft in the cold rolling step to a higher value even at such a low iron content.
  • In the practice of the invention, the total draft is preferably at least 90% in order to ensure the mechanical strength of the resulting aluminum alloy plate of the invention. The above-defined range is desirable particularly in cases where no annealing is carried out, because the mechanical strength is readily ensured.
  • On the other hand, the upper limit of the total draft in cold rolling is preferably 95% because crystal grains are excessively extended to lower the surface quality due to the crystal grains in the surface roughening treatment to be described later.
  • [Aluminum Alloy Plate (Rolled Aluminum)]
  • The aluminum alloy plate of the invention is an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate as obtained by the above-described aluminum alloy plate manufacturing method of the invention.
  • As described above, a lithographic printing plate having an excellent resistance to spotting can be obtained by using the aluminum alloy plate of the invention because the aluminum alloy plate of the invention contains up to 0.15 wt% of iron as in the ingot formed by the semicontinuous casting step.
  • Next, essential alloying ingredients other than iron in the aluminum alloy plate of the invention are described in detail.
  • Silicon is in the state of solid solution in aluminum or is present in the form of deposits of an aluminum-iron-silicon intermetallic compound or elemental silicon.
  • The silicon in the state of solid solution in aluminum has the effect of making the electrochemically grained surface uniform and the effect of mainly making the pits formed by electrochemical graining treatment deep and uniform.
  • Silicon is an element which is contained as an inadvertent impurity in the aluminum starting material. A very small amount of silicon is often intentionally added to prevent variations due to smarting material differences. The silicon content of less than 0.05 wt% is not practical, because the above-described effect5 are not achieved and a high-purity aluminum material which is expensive is required. A silicon content exceeding 0.20 wt% causes an inconvenience such as poor resistance to spotting when printing is carried out. On the other hand, in some cases, the starting material may already contain at least 0.03 wt% of silicon and a numeric value of less than 0.03 wt% is therefore not practical.
  • In the practice of the invention, the silicon content is from 0.05 to 0.20 wt%.
  • When the silicon content falls within the above-defined range, the uniformity of electrochemical graining treatment to be described later is not impaired and a lithographic printing plate obtained by using the inventive aluminum alloy plate obtained has an excellent resistance to spotting.
  • Zinc has the effect of reducing the diameter of the pits formed by electrochemical graining treatment and can be therefore added to design a desired pit shape. Addition of a large amount of zinc enables the pit diameter to be reduced.
  • In the invention, the zinc content is preferably not more than 0.01 wt%.
  • Magnesium has the effect of refining the recrystallized aluminum structure and the effect of improving the tensile strength, proof stress, fatigue strength, bending strength, thermosoftening resistance and other mechanical strength.
  • In addition, when added in an appropriate amount, magnesium also has the effect of uniformly dispersing the pits during electrolytic graining treatment.
  • In the invention, the magnesium content is preferably not more than 0.20 wt%.
  • Copper is an element which comparatively readily enters into solid solution in aluminum and greatly influences the electrochemical graining properties on a lithographic printing plate support.
  • In the invention, copper may be appropriately contained in an amount of 0.001 to 0.040 wt%.
  • The aluminum alloy plate contains aluminum and inadvertent impurities as the balance.
  • Examples of the inadvertent impurities include magnesium, chromium, zinc, vanadium, and beryllium. These may be contained in amounts of not more than 0.05 wt%, respectively.
  • Most of the inadvertent impurities will originate from the aluminum material. If the inadvertent impurities are what is present in a material having an aluminum purity of 99.5 wt%, they will not compromise the intended effects of the invention.
  • The inadvertent impurities may be, for example, impurities included in the amounts mentioned in Aluminum Alloys: Structure and Properties, by L.F. Mondolfo (1976).
  • <Surface Roughening Treatment>
  • The lithographic printing plate support of the invention is obtained by subjecting the surface of the aluminum alloy plate to the surface roughening treatment including electrochemical graining treatment.
  • The surface roughening treatment may include solely electrochemical graining treatment, or electrochemical graining treatment, mechanical graining treatment and/or chemical graining treatment in combination.
  • In cases where mechanical graining treatment is combined with electrochemical graining treatment, mechanical graining treatment is preferably followed by electrochemical graining treatment.
  • In the practice of the invention, electrochemical graining treatment is preferably carried out in an aqueous solution of nitric acid or hydrochloric acid.
  • Mechanical graining treatment is carried out as desired in order that the surface of the aluminum alloy plate may generally have a surface roughness Ra of 0.35 to 1.0 µm.
  • In the invention, mechanical graining treatment is not particularly limited for its conditions and can be carried out according to the method described in JP 50-40047 B . Mechanical graining treatment can be carried out by brush graining using a suspension of pumice or a transfer system.
  • Chemical graining treatment is also not particularly limited but may be carried out by any known method.
  • Mechanical graining treatment is preferably followed by chemical etching treatment described below.
  • The purpose of chemical etching treatment following mechanical graining treatment is to smooth edges of irregularities at the surface of the aluminum alloy plate to prevent ink from catching on the edges during printing, to improve the scumming resistance of the lithographic printing plate, and to remove abrasive particles or other unnecessary substances remaining on the surface.
  • Chemical etching processes including etching using an acid and etching using an alkali are known in the art, and an exemplary method which is particularly excellent in terms of etching efficiency includes chemical etching treatment using an aqueous alkali solution. This treatment is hereinafter referred to as "alkali etching treatment."
  • Alkaline agents that may be used in the alkali solution are not particularly limited and illustrative examples of suitable alkaline agents include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium metasilicate, sodium carbonate, sodium aluminate, and sodium gluconate.
  • The alkaline agents may contain aluminum ions. The alkali solution has a concentration of preferably at least 0.01 wt% and more preferably at least 3 wt%, but preferably not more than 30 wt% and more preferably not more than 25 wt%.
  • The alkali solution, has a temperature of preferably room temperature or higher, and more preferable at least 30°C, but preferably not more than 80°C, and more preferably not more than 75°C,
  • The amount of material removed from the aluminum alloy plate (also referred to below as the "etching amount") is preferably at least 0.1 g/m2 and more preferable at least 1 g/m2, but preferably not more than 20 g/m2 and more preferably not more than 10 g/m2.
  • The treatment time is preferably from 2 seconds to 5 minutes depending on the etching amount and more preferably from 2 to 10 seconds in terms of improving the productivity.
  • In cases where mechanical graining treatment is followed by alkali etching treatment in the invention, chemical etching treatment using an acid solution at a low temperature (hereinafter also referred to as "desmutting treatment") is preferably carried out to remove substances produced by alkali etching treatment.
  • Acids that may be used in the acid solution are not particularly limited and illustrative examples thereof include sulfuric acid, nitric acid and hydrochloric acid. The acid solution preferably has a concentration of 1 to 50 wt%. The acidic solution preferably has a temperature of 20 to 80°C. When the concentration, and temperature of the acid solution fall within the above-defined ranges, a lithographic printing plate obtained by using the inventive lithographic printing plate support obtained has a more improved resistance to spotting.
  • In the practice of the invention, the surfaces roughening treatment is a treatment in which electrochemical graining treatment is carried out after mechanical graining treatment and chemical etching treatment are carried out as desired but also in cases where electrochemical graining treatments is carried out without performing mechanical graining treatment, electrochemical graining treatment may be preceded by chemical etching treatment using an aqueous alkali solution such as sodium hydroxide. In this way, impurities which are present in the vicinity of the surface of the aluminum alloy plate can be removed.
  • Electrochemical graining treatment easily forms fine pits at the surfaces of the aluminum alloy plate and is therefore suitable to prepare a lithographic printing plate having excellent printability.
  • Electrochemical graining treatment is carried out in an aqueous solution containing nitric acid or hydrochloric acid as its main ingredient using direct or alternating current.
  • Electrochemical graining treatment enables craterlike or honeycomb pits having an average diameter of about 0.5 to 20 µm to be produced at the surface of the aluminum alloy plate at a surface area ratio of 30 to 100%. Pits having appropriate properties have the effect of improving the resistance to severe scumming and press life of the lithographic printing plate. Electrochemical graining treatment is not particularly limited for its conditions but may be carried out on the lithographic printing plate support of the invention under general conditions.
  • Electrochemical graining treatment is preferably followed by chemical etching treatment described below. Smut and intermetallic compounds are present at the surface of the aluminum alloy plate having undergone electrochemical graining treatment. In chemical etching treatment following electrochemical graining treatment, it is preferable for chemical etching using an alkali solution (alkali etching treatment) to be first carried out in order to particularly remove smut with high efficiency. The conditions in chemical etching using an alkali solution preferably include a treatment temperature of 20 to 80°C and a treatment time of 1 to 60 seconds. It is desirable for the alkali solution to contain aluminum ions.
  • In order to remove substances generated by chemical etching treatment using an alkali solution following electrochemical graining treatment, it is further preferable to carry out chemical etching treatment using an acid solution at a low temperature (desmutting treatment).
  • The conditions in desmutting treatment preferably include a treatment temperature of 20 to 80°C and a treatment time of 1 to 60 seconds. Exemplary acid solutions that may be used include solutions containing nitric acid, hydrochloric acid, or sulfuric acid as their main ingredient.
  • Even in cases where electrochemical graining treatment is not followed by alkali etching treatment, desmutting treatment is preferably carried out to remove smut efficiently.
  • The conditions in desmutting treatment preferably include a treatment temperature of 20 to 80°C and a treatment time of 1 to 60 seconds. Exemplary acid solutions that may be used include solutions containing nitric acid, hydrochloric acid or sulfuric acid as their main ingredient. Of these, solutions containing hydrochloric acid as the main ingredient are preferably used.
  • In the practice of the invention, chemical etching treatment is not particularly limited and may be carried out by immersion, showering, coating or other process.
  • <Anodizing Treatment>
  • The lithographic printing plate support of the invention is obtained by anodizing the aluminum alloy plate having undergone the surface roughening treatment.
  • No particular limitation is imposed on the electrolyte that may be used in anodizing treatment as long as a porous oxide film can be formed. In general, use may be made of sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, oxalic acid, chromic acid or a mixture thereof.
  • The concentration of the electrolyte is determined as appropriate for the type of the electrolyte used.
  • In addition, the anodizing treatment conditions considerably vary depending on the electrolyte used and are therefore not particularly limited, although it is generally suitable for the solution to have an electrolyte concentration of 1 to 80 wt% and a temperature of 5 to 70°C, and for the current density to be 1 to 60 A/dm2, the voltage to be 1 to 100 V, and the electrolysis time to be 10 to 300 seconds.
  • <Hydrophilizing Treatment>
  • The lithographic printing plate support of the invention is preferably one obtained by carrying out hydrophilizing treatment following anodizing treatment.
  • Illustrative examples of suitable hydrophilizing treatments include the potassium hexafluorozirconate treatment described in US 2,946,638 , the phosphomolybdate treatment described in US 3,201,247 , the alkyl titanate treatment described in GB 1,108,559 B , the polyacrylic acid treatment described in DE 1,091,433 B , the polyvinylphosphonic acid treatments described in DE 1,134,093 B and GB 1,230,447 B , the phosphoric acid treatment described in JP 44-6409 B , the phytic acid treatment described in US 3,307,951 , the treatments involving the divalent metal salts of lipophilic organic polymeric compounds described in JP 58-16893 A and JP 58-18291 A , a treatment like that described in US 3,860,426 in which an aqueous metal salt (e.g., zinc acetate)-containing hydrophilic cellulose (e.g., carboxymethyl cellulose) undercoat is provided, and an undercoating treatment like that described in JP 59-101651 A in which a sulfo group-bearing water-soluble polymer is applied.
  • Additional examples of suitable hydrophilizing treatments include those which involve undercoating the aluminum alloy plate with the phosphates mentioned in JP 62-19494 A , the water-soluble epoxy compounds mentioned in JP 62-33692 A , the phosphoric acid-modified starches mentioned in JP 62-97892 A , the diamine compounds mentioned in JP 63-56498 A , the inorganic or organic salts of amino acids mentioned in JP 63-130391 A , the carboxy or hydroxy group-bearing organic phosphonic acids mentioned in JP 63-145092 A , the amino group- and phosphonate group-bearing compounds mentioned in JP 63-165183 A , the specific carboxylic acid derivatives mentioned in JP 2-316290 A , the phosphate esters mentioned in JP 3-215095 A , the compounds having one amino group and one phosphorus oxo acid group mentioned in JP 3-261592 A , the phosphate esters mentioned in JP 3-215095 A , the aliphatic or aromatic phosphonic acids (e.g., phenylphosphonic acid) mentioned in JP 5-246171 A , the sulfur atom-containing compounds (e.g., thiosalicylic acid) mentioned in JP 1-307745 A , and the phosphorus oxo acid group-bearing compounds mentioned in JP 4-282637 A .
  • Coloration with an acid dye as mentioned in JP 60-64352 A may also be carried out.
  • It is preferable to carry out hydrophilizing treatment by a method in which the aluminum alloy plate is immersed in an aqueous solution of an alkali metal silicate such as sodium silicate or potassium silicate, or is coated with a hydrophilic vinyl polymer or a hydrophilic compound so as to form a hydrophilic undercoat.
  • Hydrophilizing treatment with an aqueous solution of an alkali metal silicate such as sodium silicate or potassium silicate can be carried out according to the processes and procedures described in US 2,714,066 and US 3,181,461 .
  • Illustrative examples of suitable alkali metal silicates include sodium silicate, potassium silicate and lithium silicate. The aqueous solution of an alkali metal silicate may include also a suitable amount of, for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide or lithium hydroxide.
  • The aqueous solution of an alkali metal silicate may include also an alkaline earth metal salt or a Group 4 (Group IVA) metal salt. Examples of suitable alkaline earth metal salts include nitrates such as calcium nitrate, strontium nitrate, magnesium nitrate and barium nitrate; and also sulfates, hydrochlorides, phosphates, acetates, oxalates, and borates. Exemplary Group 4 (Group IVA) metal salts include titanium tetrachloride, titanium trichloride, titanium potassium fluoride, titanium potassium oxalate, titanium sulfate, titanium tetraiodide, zirconyl chloride, zirconium dioxide and zirconium tetrachloride. These alkaline earth metal salts and Group 4 (Group IVA) metal salts may be used singly or in combination of two or more thereof.
  • The amount of silicon adsorbed as a result of alkali metal silicate treatment can be measured with a fluorescent x-ray analyzer, and is preferably 1.0 to 30 mg/m2,
  • The alkali metal silicate treatment has the effect of enhancing the resistance at the surface of the lithographic printing plate support to dissolution in an alkali developer, suppressing the leaching of aluminum components into the developer, and reducing the generation of development scum arising from developer fatigue.
  • Hydrophilizing treatment for forming a hydrophilic undercoat may also be carried out according to the conditions and procedures described in JP 59-101651 A and JP 60-149491 A .
  • Hydrophilic vinyl polymers that may be used in such a method include copolymers of a sulfo group-bearing vinyl polymerizable compound such as polyvinyl sulfonic acid or sulfo group-bearing p-styrenesulfonic acid with a conventional vinyl polymerizable compound such as an alkyl (meth)acrylate. Examples of hydrophilic compounds that may be used in this method include compounds having at least one group selected from among -NH2 group, -COOH group and sulfo group.
  • On the other hand, in the practice of the invention, the lithographic printing plate support is preferably obtained by subjecting the aluminum alloy plate to the respective treatments described in Aspects A to C in the orders shown below. Rinsing with water is desirably carried out between the respective treatments. However, in cases where a solution of the same composition is used in the consecutively carried out two steps (treatments), rinsing with water may be omitted.
  • (Aspect A)
    1. (1) Mechanical graining treatment;
    2. (2) Chemical etching treatment in an aqueous alkali solution (first alkali etching treatment);
    3. (3) Chemical etching treatment in an aqueous acid solution (first desmutting treatment);
    4. (4) Electrochemical graining treatment in a nitric acid-based aqueous solution (first electrochemical graining treatment);
    5. (5) Chemical etching treatment in an aqueous alkali solution (second alkali etching treatment):
    6. (6) Chemical etching treatment in an aqueous acid solution (second desmutting treatment);
    7. (7) Electrochemical graining treatment in a hydrochloric acid-based aqueous solution (second electrochemical graining treatment)
    8. (8) Chemical etching treatment in an aqueous alkali solution (third alkali etching treatment)
    9. (9) Chemical etching treatment in an aqueous acid solution (third desmutting treatment);
    10. (10) Anodizing treatment; and
    11. (11) Hydrophilizing treatment.
    (Aspect B)
    • (2) Chemical etching treatment in an aqueous alkali solution (first alkali etching treatment);
    • (3) Chemical etching treatment in an aqueous acid solution (first Desmutting treatment);
    • (12) Electrochemical graining treatment in a hydrochloric acid-based aqueous solution;
    • (5) Chemical etching treatment in an aqueous alkali solution (second alkali etching treatment);
    • (6) Chemical etching treatment in an aqueous acid solution (second desmutting treatment);
    • (10) Anodizing treatment; and
    • (11) Hydrophilizing treatment.
    (Aspect C)
    • (2) Chemical etching treatment in an aqueous alkali solution (first alkali etching treatment);
    • (3) Chemical etching treatment in an aqueous acid solution (first desmutting treatment);
    • (4) Electrochemical graining treatment in a nitric acid-based aqueous solution (first electrochemical graining treatment);
    • (5) Chemical etching treatment in an aqueous alkali solution (second alkali etching treatment);
    • (6) Chemical etching treatment in an aqueous acid solution (second desmutting treatment);
    • (7) Electrochemical graining treatment in a hydrochloric acid-based aqueous solution (second electrochemical graining treatment);
    • (8) Chemical etching treatment in an aqueous alkali solution (third alkali etching treatment):
    • (9) Chemical etching treatment in an aqueous acid solution (third desmutting treatment);
    • (10) Anodizing treatment; and
    • (11) Hydrophilizing treatment.
  • Mechanical graining treatment, electrochemical graining treatment, chemical etching treatment, anodizing treatment and hydrophilizing treatment in (1) to (12) described above may be carried out by the same treatment methods and conditions as those described above, but the treatment methods and conditions to be described below are preferably used to carry out such treatments.
  • In order to form pits having shapes specific to the lithographic printing plate support of the invention, it is necessary to carry out electrochemical graining treatment in an aqueous hydrochloric acid solution following electrochemical graining treatment in an aqueous nitric acid solution to be described later.
  • Mechanical graining treatment is preferably carried out by using a rotating nylon brush roll having a bristle diameter of 0.2 to 1.61 mm and a slurry supplied to the surface of the aluminum alloy plate.
  • Known abrasives may be used and illustrative examples that may be preferably used include silica sand, quartz, aluminum hydroxide and a mixture thereof, A detailed description is given in JP 6-135175 A and JP 50-40047 B .
  • The slurry preferably has a specific gravity of 1.05 to 1.3. Use may be made of a technique that involves spraying of the slurry, a technique that involves the use of a wire brush, or a technique in which the surface shape of a textured mill roll is transferred to the aluminum alloy plate. Other techniques are described in JP 55-074898 A , JP 61-162351 A and JP 63-104889 A .
  • The aqueous alkali solution that may be used in chemical etching treatment in the aqueous alkali solution has a concentration of preferably 1 to 30 wt% and may contain aluminum and also alloying ingredients present in the aluminum alloy in an amount of 0 to 10 wt%.
  • An aqueous solution composed mainly of sodium hydroxide is preferably used for the aqueous alkali solution. Chemical etching is preferably carried out at a solution temperature of room temperature to 95°C for a period of 1 to 120 seconds.
  • After the end of etching treatment, removal of the treatment solution with nip rollers and rinsing by spraying with water are preferably carried out in order to prevent the treatment solution from being carried into the subsequent step.
  • In the first alkali etching treatment, the aluminum alloy plate is dissolved in an amount of preferably 0.5 to 30 g/m2, more preferably 1.0 to 20 g/m2, and even more preferably 3.0 to 15 g/m2.
  • In the second alkali etching treatment, the aluminum alloy plate is dissolved in an amount of 0.001 to 30 g/m2, more preferably 0.1 to 4 g/m2, and even more preferably 0.2 to 1.5 g/m2.
  • In the third alkali etching treatment, the aluminum alloy plate is dissolved in an amount of preferably 0.001 to 30 g/m2, more preferably 0.01 to 0.8 g/m2, and even more preferably 0.02 to 0.3 g/m2.
  • In chemical etching treatment in an aqueous acid solution (first to third desmutting treatments), phosphoric acid, nitric acid, sulfuric acid, chromic acid, hydrochloric acid or a mixed acid containing two or more thereof may be advantageously used.
  • The aqueous acid solution preferably has a concentration of 0.5 to 60 wt%.
  • Aluminum and also alloying ingredients present in the aluminum alloy may dissolve in the aqueous acid solution in an amount of 0 to 5 wt%.
  • Chemical etching is preferably carried out at a solution temperature of room temperature to 95°C for a treatment time of 1 to 120 seconds. After the end of desmutting treatment, removal of the treatment solution with nip rollers and rinsing by spraying with water are preferably carried out in order to prevent the treatment solution from being carried into the subsequent step.
  • The aqueous solution that may be used in electrochemical graining treatment is now described.
  • An aqueous solution which is used in conventional electrochemical graining treatments involving the use of direct current or alternating current may be employed for the nitric acid-based aqueous solution used in the first electrochemical graining treatment. The aqueous solution to be used may be prepared by adding to an aqueous solution having a nitric acid concentration of 1 to 100 g/L at least one nitrate compound containing nitrate ions, such as aluminum nitrate, sodium nitrate or ammonium nitrate, or at least one chloride compound containing chloride ions, such as aluminum chloride, sodium chloride or ammonium chloride in a range of 1 g/L to saturation.
  • Metals which are present in the aluminum alloy, such as iron, copper, manganese, nickel, titanium, magnesium and silicon may also be dissolved in the nitric acid-based aqueous solution.
  • More specifically, use is preferably made of a solution to which aluminum chloride or aluminum nitrate is added so that a 0.5 to 2 wt% aqueous solution of nitric acid may contain 3 to 50 g/L of aluminum ions.
  • The temperature is preferably from 10 to 90°C and more preferably from 40 to 80°C,
  • An aqueous solution which is used in conventional electrochemical graining treatment involving the use of direct current or alternating current may be employed for the hydrochloric acid-based aqueous solution used in the second electrochemical graining treatment. The aqueous solution to be used may be prepared by adding to an aqueous solution having a hydrochloric acid concentration of 1 to 100 g/L at least one nitrate compound containing nitrate ions, such as aluminum nitrate, sodium nitrate or ammonium nitrate, or at least one chloride compound containing chloride ions, such as aluminum chloride, sodium chloride or ammonium chloride in a range of 1 g/L to saturation.
  • Metals which are present in the aluminum alloy, such as iron, copper, manganese, nickel, titanium, magnesium and silicon may also be dissolved in the hydrochloric acid-based aqueous solution.
  • More specifically, use is preferably made of a solution to which aluminum chloride or aluminum nitrate is added so that a 0.5 to 2 wt% aqueous solution of nitric acid may contain 3 to 50 g/L of aluminum ions.
  • The temperature is preferably from 10 to 60°C and more preferably from 20 to 50°C. Hypochlorous acid may be added to the aqueous solution.
  • On the other hand, an aqueous solution which is used in conventional electrochemical graining treatment involving the use of direct current or alternating current may be employed for the hydrochloric acid-based aqueous solution used in electrochemical graining treatment in the aqueous hydrochloric acid solution. The aqueous solution to be used may be prepared by adding 0 to 30 g/L of sulfuric acid to an aqueous solution having a hydrochloric acid concentration of 1 to 100 g/L. The aqueous solution may be prepared by adding to this aqueous solution at least one nitrate compound containing nitrate ions, such as aluminum nitrate, sodium nitrate or ammonium nitrate, or at least one chloride compound containing chloride ions, such as aluminum chloride, sodium chloride or ammonium chloride in a range of 1 g/L to saturation.
  • Metals which are present in the aluminum alloy, such as iron, copper, manganese, nickel, titanium, magnesium and silicon may also be dissolved in the hydrochloric acid-based aqueous solution.
  • More specifically, use is preferably made of a solution to which aluminum chloride or aluminum nitrate is added so that a 0.5 to 2 wt% aqueous solution of nitric acid may contain 3 to 50 g/L of aluminum-ions.
  • The temperature is preferably from 10 to 60°C and more preferably from 20 to 50°C. Hypochlorous acid may be added to the aqueous solution.
  • A sinusoidal, square, trapezoidal or triangular waveform may be used as the waveform of the alternating current in electrochemical graining treatment. The frequency is preferably from 0.1 to 250 Hz.
  • FIG. 1 is a graph showing an example of an alternating current waveform that may be used to carry out electrochemical graining treatment in the method of manufacturing a lithographic printing plate support of the invention.
  • In Fig. 1, "ta" represents the anodic reaction time, "tc" the cathodic reaction time, "tp" the time required for the current to reach a peak from zero, "Ia" the peak current on the anode cycle side, and "Ic" the peak current on the cathode cycle side. In the trapezoidal waveform, it is preferable for the time tp until the current reaches a peak from zero to be from 1 to 10 ms. At a time tp of less than 1 ms under the influence of impedance in the power supply circuit, a large power supply voltage is required at the leading edge of the current pulse, thus increasing the power supply equipment costs. At a time tp of more than 10 ms, the aluminum alloy plate tends to be affected by trace ingredients in the electrolytic solution, making it difficult to carry out uniform graining. One cycle of alternating current that may be used in electrochemical graining treatment preferably satisfies the following conditions: the ratio of the cathodic reaction time to to the anodic reaction time ta in the aluminum alloy plate (tc/ta) is from 1 to 20; the ratio of the amount of electricity Qc when the aluminum alloy plate serves as a cathode to the amount of electricity Qa when it serves as an anode (Qc/Qa) is from 0.3 to 20; and the anodic reaction time ta is from 5 to 1,000 ms. The ratio tc/ta is more preferably from 2.5 to 15. The ratio Qc/Qa is more preferably from 2.5 to 15. The current density at the current peak in the trapezoidal waveform is preferably from 10 to 200 A/dm2 on both of the anode cycle side (Ia) and the cathode cycle side (Ic). The ratio Ic/Ia is preferably in a range of 0.3 to 20. The total amount of electricity furnished for the anodic reaction on the aluminum alloy plate up until completion of electrochemical graining treatment is preferably from 25 to 1,000 C/dm2,
  • In the practice of the invention, any known electrolytic cell employed for surface treatment, including vertical, flat and radial type electrolytic cells, may be used to carry out electrochemical graining treatment using alternating current. Radial-type electrolytic cells such as those described in JP 5-195300 A are especially preferred. The electrolytic solution is passed through the electrolytic cell either parallel or counter to the direction in which the aluminum alloy plate (aluminum web) advances. One or more AC power supplies may be connected to one electrolytic cell. Two or more electrolytic cells may also be used.
  • An apparatus shown in FIG. 2 may be used for electrochemical graining treatment using alternating current.
  • FIG. 2 is a side view of a radial electrolytic cell that may be used in electrochemical graining treatment with alternating current in the method of manufacturing the lithographic printing plate support of the invention.
  • FIG. 2 shows a main electrolytic cell 50, an AC power supply 51, a radial drum roller 52, main electrodes 53a and 53b, a solution feed inlet 54, an electrolytic solution 55, auxiliary anodes 58, an auxiliary anode cell 60 and an aluminum alloy plate W. When two or more electrolytic cells are used, electrolysis may be carried out under the same or different conditions.
  • The aluminum alloy plate W is wound around the radial drum roller 52 disposed so as to be immersed in the electrolytic solution within the main electrolytic cell 50 and is electrolyzed by the main electrodes 53a and 53b connected to the AC power supply 51 as it is transported, The electrolytic solution 55 is fed from the solution feed inlet 54 through a slit 56 to a solution channel 57 between the radial drum roller 52 and the main electrodes 53a and 53b. The aluminum alloy plate W treated in the main electrolytic cell 50 is then electrolyzed in the auxiliary anode cell 60. In the auxiliary anode cell 60, the auxiliary anodes 58 are disposed in a face-to-face relationship with the aluminum alloy plate W so that the electrolytic solution 55 flows through the space between the auxiliary anodes 58 and the aluminum alloy plate W.
  • On the other hand, electrochemical graining treatment (first and second electrochemical graining treatments) may be carried out by a method in which the aluminum alloy plate is electrochemically grained by applying direct current between the aluminum alloy plate and the electrodes opposed thereto.
  • An electrolytic solution which is used in known electrochemical graining treatment involving the use of direct current or alternating current may be used. The temperature is preferably from 10 to 80°C. A known treatment apparatus using direct current can be employed for electrochemical graining treatment involving the use of direct current, but an apparatus as described in JP 1-141094 A is preferably used in which one or more pairs of anodes and cathodes are disposed alternately. Exemplary known apparatuses are described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application No. 5-68204 , Japanese Patent Application No. 6-205657 , Japanese Patent Application No. 6-21050 , JP 61-19115 A , and JP 57-44760 B . Direct current may be applied between the conductor roll in contact with the aluminum alloy plate and the cathode opposed thereto to carry out electrochemical graining treatment on the aluminum alloy plate serving as the anode. After the end of electrolytic treatment, removal of the treatment solution with nip rollers and rinsing by spraying with water are preferably carried out in order to prevent the treatment solution from being carried into the subsequent step. The direct current used for electrochemical graining preferably has a ripple ratio of not more than 20%. The current density is preferably from 10 to 200 A/dm2 and the amount of electricity when the aluminum alloy plate serves as the anode is preferably from 25 to 1,000 C/dm2. The anode to be used may be selected from known electrodes for generating oxygen including ones formed by cladding or plating valve metals such as titanium, niobium and zirconium with ferrite, iridium oxide, and platinum. The cathode to be used may be selected from among carbon, platinum, titanium, niobium, zirconium stainless steel and other materials for use in fuel cell cathodes.
  • [Presensitized Plate]
  • The presensitized plate of the invention can be obtained by forming an image recording layer on the lithographic printing plate support of the invention.
  • [Image Recording Layer]
  • The image recording layer that may be used in the presensitized plate of the invention can be removed by printing ink and/or fountain solution. More specifically, the image recording layer is preferably one which has an infrared absorber, a polymerization initiator and a polymerizable compound and is capable of recording by exposure to infrared light.
  • In the presensitized plate of the invention, irradiation with infrared light cures exposed portions of the image recording layer to form hydrophobic (lipophilic) regions, while at the start of printing, unexposed portions are promptly removed from the support by fountain solution, ink, or an emulsion of ink and fountain solution.
  • The constituents of the image recording layer are described below.
  • (Infrared Absorber)
  • In cases where an image is formed on the presensitized plate of the invention using a laser emitting infrared light at 760 to 1200 nm as a light source, an infrared absorber is usually used.
  • The infrared absorber has the function of converting absorbed infrared light into heat and the function of transferring electrons and energy to the polymerization initiator (radical generator) to be described below by excitation with infrared light.
  • The infrared absorber that may be used in the invention is a dye or pigment having an absorption maximum in a wavelength range of 760 to 1200 nm. Dyes which may be used include commercial dyes and known dyes that are mentioned in the technical literature, such as Senryo Binran [Handbook of Dyes] (The Society of Synthetic Organic Chemistry, Japan, 1970).
  • Illustrative examples of suitable dyes include azo dyes, metal complex azo dyes, pyrazolone azo dyes, naphthoquinone dyes, anthraquinone dyes, phthalocyanine dyes, carbonium dyes, quinoneimine dyes, methine dyes, cyanine dyes, squarylium dyes, pyrylium salts and metal-thiolate complexes.
  • Preferred dyes include the cyanine dyes mentioned in JP 58-125246 A , JP 59-84356 A , JP 60-78787 A and GB 434,875 B ; the methine dyes mentioned in JP 58-173696 A , JP 58-181690 A and JP 58-194595 A ; the naphthoquinone dyes mentioned in JP 58-112793 A , JP 58-224793 A , JP 59-48187 A , JP 59-73996 A , JP 60-52940 A and JP 60-63744 A ; and the squarylium dyes mentioned in JP 58-112792 A .
  • Other exemplary dyes that may be preferably used include the near-infrared absorbing dyes mentioned in US 4,756,993 as represented by the formulas (I) and (II).
  • Still other examples of the dyes that may be advantageously used include the near-infrared absorbers/sensitizers mentioned in US 5,156,938 . Other compounds that are suitable for use in this way include the substituted arylbenzo(thio)pyrylium salts mentioned in US 3,881,924 ; the trimethinethiapyrylium salts mentioned in JP 57-142645 A ( US 4,327,169 ), the pyrylium compounds mentioned in JP 58-181051 A , JP 58-220143 A , JP 59-41363 A , JP 59-84248 A , JP 59-84249 A , JP 59-146063 A and JP 59-146061 A ; the cyanide dyes mentioned in JP 59-216146 A ; the pentamethinethiopyrylium salts mentioned in US 4,283,475 ; and the pyrylium compounds mentioned in JP 5-13514 B and JP 5-19702 B .
  • Additional preferable examples of the dyes include the infrared absorbing dyes and more specifically specific indolenine cyanine dyes mentioned in JP 2002-278057 A which are illustrated below.
    Figure imgb0002
    Figure imgb0003
    Figure imgb0004
  • Of the illustrated dyes, cyanine dyes, squarylium dyes, pyrylium salts, nickel-thiolate complexes and indolenine cyanine dyes are particularly preferred. In addition, cyanine dyes and indolenine cyanine dyes are more preferred, and cyanine dyes of the general formula (i) below are most preferred.
    Figure imgb0005
  • In the general formula (i), X1 is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, -NPh2 (where "Ph" represents a phenyl group), -X2-L1, or a group of the following formula.
  • In the above formula, X2 is an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom or a sulfur atom; L1 is a hydrocarbon group of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, an aromatic ring having a heteroatom, or a hydrocarbon group of 1 to 12 carbon atoms having a heteroatom. "Hetaroatom," as used herein, refers to a nitrogen, sulfur, oxygen, halogen or selenium atom. Xa - is defined in the same way as Za - described below; and Ra is a substituent selected from among hydrogen atom, alkyl groups, aryl groups, substituted or unsubstituted amino groups and halogen atoms.
    Figure imgb0006
  • R1 and R2 are each independently a hydrocarbon group of 1 to 12 carbon atoms. For good storage stability of the image recording layer-forming coating fluid, it is preferable for R1 and R2 each to be a hydrocarbon group having at least two carbon atoms. It is especially preferable for R1 and R2 to be bonded together so as to form a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • Ar1 and Ar2 are each independently an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may be substituted. Preferred aromatic hydrocarbon groups include benzene and naphthalene rings. Preferred substituents include hydrocarbon groups of up to 12 carbon atoms, halogen atoms, and alkoxy groups of up to 12 carbon atoms, with hydrocarbon groups of up to 12 carbon atoms and alkoxy groups of up to 12 carbon atoms being most preferred.
  • Y1 and Y2 are each independently a sulfur atom or a dialkylmethylene group of up to 12 carbon atoms.
  • R3 and R4 are each independently a hydrocarbon group of up to 20 carbon atoms which may be substituted. Preferred substituents include alkoxy groups of up to 12 carbon atoms, carboxy group and sulfo group, with alkoxy groups of up to 12 carbon atoms being most preferred.
  • R5, R6, R7 and R8 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group of up to 12 carbon atoms. In consideration of the availability of the starting materials, it is preferable for each of R5 to R5 to be a hydrogen atom.
  • Za - represents a counteranion. In cases where the cyanine dye of the general formula (i) has an anionic substituent in the structure and there is no need for charge neutralization, Za - is unnecessary. For good storage stability of the image recording layer-forming coating fluid, preferred examples of Za - include halide ions (e.g., Cl- and Br-), perchlorate ion (ClO4 -), tetrafluoroborate ion (BF4 -), hexafluorophosphate ion (PF6 -) and sulfonate ion. Of these, perchlorate ion, tetrafluoroborate ion, hexafluorophosphate ion and arylsulfonate ion are more preferred.
  • Specific examples of cyanine dyes of the general formula (i) that may be preferably used in the invention include those described in Paragraphs [0017] to [0019] of JP 2001-133969 A .
  • Other preferred examples of the cyanine dyes include the specific indolenine cyanine dyes mentioned in JP 2002-278057 A .
  • Pigments which may be used include commercial pigments and pigments mentioned in the technical literature, such as the Colour Index (C.I.), Saishin Ganryo Binran [Latest Handbook of Pigments] (Japan Association of Pigment Technology, 1977), Saishin Ganryo Oyo Gijutsu [Recent Pigment Applications Technology] (CMC Publishing Co., Ltd., 1986), and Insatsu Inki Gijutsu [Printing Ink Technology] (CMC Publishing Co., Lid., 1984).
  • Suitable pigments include black pigments, yellow pigments, orange pigments, brown pigments, red pigments, violet pigments, blue pigments, green pigments, fluorescent pigments, metal powder pigments and polymer-bonded dyes.
  • Specific examples of such pigments include insoluble azo pigments, azo lake pigments, condensed azo pigments, chelate azo pigments, phthalocyanine pigments, anthraquinone pigments, perylene and perinone pigments, thioindigo pigments, guinacridone pigments, dioxazine pigments, isoindolinone pigments, quinophthalone pigments, lake pigments, azine pigments, nitroso pigments, nitro pigments, natural pigments, fluorescent pigments, inorganic pigments and carbon black.
  • Of these, carbon black is preferred.
  • The pigments may be used without being surface treated or may be used after surface treatment.
  • Examples of surface treatment methods include surface coating with a resin or wax, surfactant deposition, and bonding a reactive substance (e.g., a silane coupling agent, an epoxy compound or a polyisocyanate) to the pigment surface.
  • Surface treatment methods that may be used include those described in Kinzoku Sekken no Seishitsu to Oyo [Properties and Applications of Metallic Soaps] (Saiwai Shobo), Insatsu Inki Gijutsu [Printing Ink Technology] (CMC Publishing Co., Ltd., 1984), and Saishin Ganryo Oyo Gijutsu [Recent Pigment Applications Technology] (CMC Publishing Co., Ltd., 1986).
  • The pigment has a particle size which is in a range of preferably 0.01 to 10 µm, more preferably 0.05 to 1 µm, and even more preferably 0.1 to 1 µm. When the particle size of the pigment is within the above range, the pigment dispersion has a good stability in the image recording layer-forming coating fluid, and an image recording layer obtained has a good uniformity.
  • Known dispersion techniques, such as those which can be used in ink production or toner production, may be employed as the method for dispersing the pigment. Illustrative examples of equipment that may be used for this purpose include an ultrasonic disperse, a sand mill, an attritor, a pearl mill, a super mill, a ball mill, an impeller, a disperser, a KD mill, a colloid mill, a dynatron, a three-roll mill and a pressure kneader. These methods of dispersion and dispersion apparatuses are described in Saishin Ganryo Oyo Gijutsu [Recent Pigment Applications Technology] (CMC Publishing Co., Ltd., 1986).
  • Although these infrared absorbers may be added to the layer that includes the other ingredients or may be added to a separately provided layer, they are added so that the image recording layer may have an absorbance, as measured by reflectrometry at a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength range of 760 nm to 1,200 nm, of 0.3 to 1,2 when a negative-type presensitized plate is prepared. The absorbance is preferably in a range of 0.4 to 1.1. Within this range, a uniform polymerization reaction proceeds in the depth direction of the image recording layer to achieve high film strength in image areas and good adhesion to the lithographic printing plate support.
  • The absorbance of the image recording layer can be adjusted by the amount of infrared absorber added to the image recording layer and the thickness of the image recording layer. The absorbance may be measured by an ordinary method. Exemplary measurement methods include one which involves forming on a reflective support made of aluminum or the like, an image recording layer having a thickness appropriately determined so that the coating weight after drying falls within the necessary range for the lithographic printing plate, and measuring the reflection density with an optical densitometer, and one which involves measuring the absorbance with a spectrophotometer by a reflection method using an integrating sphere.
  • (Polymerization Initiator)
  • Exemplary polymerization initiators which may be used are compounds that generate a radical under light or heat energy or both, and initiate or promote the polymerization of a compound having a polymerizable unsaturated group. In the invention, compounds that generate a radical under the action of heat (thermal radical generator) are preferably used.
  • Known thermal polymerisation initiators, compounds having a small bond dissociation energy and photopolymerization initiators may be used as the polymerization initiator.
  • Compounds which generate a radical include organic halogen compounds, carbonyl compounds, organic peroxides, azo polymerization initiators, azide compounds, metallocene compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, organic borate compounds, disulfone compounds, oxime ester compounds and onium salt compounds.
  • Organic halogen compounds that may be used include those mentioned in, for example, Wakabayashi et al.: Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan 42, 2924 (1969), US 3,905,815 , JP 46-4605 B , JP 48-36281 A , JP 55-32070 A , JP 60-239736 A , JP 61-169835 A , JP 61-169837 A , JP 62-58241 A , JP 62-212401 A , JP 63-70243 A , JP 63-298339 A , and M.P. Hutt: Journal of Heterocyclic Chemistry 1, No. 3 (1970). Specifically, the use of oxazole compounds and s-triazine compounds substituted with a trihalomethyl group is preferred.
  • The use of s-triazine derivatives having at least one mono-, di- or trihalogenated methyl group attached to the s-triazine ring is more preferred. Compounds that may be used include, more specifically, 2,'4,6-tris(monochloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2,4,6-tris(dichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2,4,6-tris(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-methyl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-n-propyl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-(α,α,β,-trichloroethyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-phenyl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-(p-methoxyphenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-(3,4-epoxyphenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-(p-chlorophenyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-[1-(p-methoxyphenyl)-2,4-butadienyl]-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-styryl-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-(p-methoxystyryl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-(p-i-propyloxystyryl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-(p-tolyl)-4, 6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-(4-methoxynaphthyl)-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-phenylthio-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2-benzylthio-4,6-bis(trichloromethyl)-s-triazine, 2,4,6-tris(dibromomethyl)-s-triazine, 2,4,6-tris(tribromomethyl)-s-triazine, 2-methyl-4,6-bis(tribromomethyl)-s-triazine, and 2-methoxy-4,6-bis(tribromomethyl)-s-triazine.
  • Specific examples of carbonyl compounds that may be used include benzophenone and benzophenone derivatives such as Michler's ketone, 2-methylbenzophenone, 3-methylbenzophenone, 4-methylbenzophenone, 2-chlorobenzophenone, 4-bromobenzophenone and 2-carboxybenzophenone; acetophenone derivatives such as 2,2-dimethoxy-2-phenylacetophenone, 2,2-diethoxyacetophenone, 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone, α-hydroxy-2-methyl phenyl propanone, 1-hydroxy-1-methylethyl-(p-isopropylphenyl) ketone, 1-hydroxy-1-(p-dodecylphenyl) ketone, 2-methyl-(4'-(methylthio)phenyl)-2-morpholino-1-propanone and 1,1,1-trichloromethyl-(p-butylphenyl)ketone; thioxanthone and thioxanthone derivatives such as 2-ethylthioxanthone, 2-isopropylthioxanthone, 2-chlorothioxanthone, 2,4-dimethylthioxanthone, 2,4-diethylthioxanthone and 2,4-diisopropylthioxanthone; and benzoic acid ester derivatives such as ethyl p-dimethylaminobenzoate and ethyl p-diethylaminobenzoate.
  • Examples of azo polymerization initiators that may be used include the azo compounds mentioned in JP 8-108621 A .
  • Specific examples of organic peroxides that may be used include trimethylcyclohexanone peroxide, acetylacetone peroxide, 1,1-bis(tert-butylperoxy)-3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane, 1,1-bis(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane, 2,2-bis(tert-butylperoxy)butane, tert-butyl hydroperoxide, cumene hydroperoxide, diisopropylbenzene hydroperoxide, 2,5-dimethylhexane-2,5-dihydroperoxid, 1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl hydroperoxide, tert-butylcumyl peroxide, dicumyl peroxide, 2,5-dimethyl-2,5-di(tert-butylperoxy)hexane, 2,5-oxanoyl peroxide, succinic acid peroxide, benzoyl peroxide, 2,4-dichlorobenzoyl peroxide, diisopropyl peroxydicarbonate, di-2-ethylhexyl peroxydicarbonate, di-2-ethoxyethyl peroxydicarbenate, dimethoxyisopropyl peroxycarbonate, di(3-methyl-3-methoxybutyl) peroxydicarbonate, tert-butyl peroxyacetate, tart-butyl peroxypivalate, tert-butyl peroxyneodeeanoate, test-butyl peroxyoctanoate, tert-butyl peroxylaurate, 3,3',4,4'-tetra-(t-butylperoxycarbonyl)benzophenone, 3,3',4,4'-tetra-(t-hexyl peroxycarbonyl)benzophenone, 3,3',4,4'-tetra-(p-isopropylcumyl peroxycarbonyl)benzophenone, carbonyl di(t-butyl peroxydihydrogendiphthalate) and carbonyl di(t-hexyl peroxydihydrogendiphthalate).
  • Metallocene compounds that may be used include various titanocene compounds mentioned in, for example, JP 59-152396 A , JP 61-151197 A , JP 63-41484 A , JP 2-249 A , JP 2-4705 A and JP 5-83588 A , such as dicyclopentadienyltitanium bisphenyl, dicyclopentadienyltitanium bis-2,6-difluorophen-1-yl, dicyclopentadienyltitanium bis-2,4-difluorophen-1-yl, dicyclopentadienyltitanium bis-2,4,6-trifluorophen-1-yl, dicyclopentadienyltitanium bis-2,3,5,6-tetrafluorophen-1-yl, dicyclopentadienyltitanium bis-2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorophen-1-yl, dimethylcyclopentadienyltitanium bis-2,6-difluorophen-1-yl, dimethylcyclopentadienyltitanium bis-2,4,6-trifluorophen-1-yl, dimethylcyclopentadienyltitanium bis-2,3,5,6-tetrafluorophen-1-yl and dimethylcyclopentadienyltitanium bis-2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorophen-1-yl; and the iron-arene complexes mentioned in, for example, JP 1-304453 A and JP 1-152109 A .
  • Hexaarylbiimidazole compounds that may be used include various compounds mentioned in, for example, JP 6-25285 B , US 3,479,185 , US 4,311,793 and US 4,622,286 . Specific examples include 2,2'-bis(o-chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o-bromophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o,p-dichlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o-chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetra(m-methoxyphenyl)biimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o,o'-dichlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o-nitrophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole, 2,2'-bis(o-methylphenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole and 2,2'-bis(o-trifluorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole.
  • Examples of organic boron compounds that may be used include the organic berates mentioned in, for example, JP 62-143044 A , JP 62-150242 A , JP 9-188685 A , JP 9-188686 A , JP 9-188710 A , JP 2000-131837 A , JP 2002-107916 A , JP 2764769 B , JP 2002-116539 A and by Martin Kunz in Rad Tech' 98. Proceedings (April 19-22, 1998, Chicago); the organic boron sulfonium complexes and organic boron oxosulfonium complexes mentioned in JP 6-157623 A , JP 6-175564 A and JP 6-175561 A ; the organic boron iodonium complexes mentioned in JP 6-175554 A and JP 6-175553 A ; the organic boron phosphonium complexes mentioned in JP 9-188710 A ; and the organic boron transition metal coordination complexes mentioned in JP 6-348011 A , JP 7-128785 A , JP 7-140589 A , JP 7-306527 A and JP 7-292014 A .
  • Examples of disulfone compounds that may be used include the compounds mentioned in, for example, JP 61-166544 A and JP 2003-328465 A .
  • Examples of oxime ester compounds that may be used include the compounds mentioned in, for example, JCS Perkin II (1979) 1653-1660, JCS Perkin II (1979) 156-162, Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995) 202-232, JP 2000-66385 A and JP 2000-80068 A . Specific examples include the compounds having the following structural formulas.
    Figure imgb0007
  • Specific examples of onium salt compounds that may be used include the diazonium salts mentioned by S.I. Schlesinger in Photogr. Sci. Eng. 18, 387 (1974) and by T.S. Bal et al. in Polymer 21, 423 (1980); the ammonium salts mentioned in US 4,069,055 and JP 4-365049 A ; the phosphonium salts mentioned in US 4,069,055 and US 4,069,056 ; the iodonium salts mentioned in EP 104,143 B , JP 2-150848 A and JP 2-296514 A ; the sulfonium salts mentioned in EP 370,693 B , EP 390,214B , EP 233,567 B , EP 297,443 B , EP 297,442 B , US 4,933,377 , US 410,201 , US 339,049 , US 4,760,013 , US 4,734,444 , US 2,833,827 , DE 2,904,626 , DE 3,604,5e0 and DE 3,604,581 ; the selenonium salts mentioned by J.V. Crivello et al. in Macromolecules 10 (6), 1307 (1977) and by J.V. Crivello et al. in J. Polymer Sci., Polymer Chem. Ed. 17, 1047 (1979); and the arsonium salts mentioned by C.S. Wen at al. in Teh, Proc. Conf. Rad. Curing ASIA, p. 478 (October 1988, Tokyo).
  • Of these onium salts, the oxime ester compounds, diazonium salts, iodonium salts and sulfonium salts are preferred in terms of reactivity and stability.
  • In the practice of the invention, these onium salts function not as acid generators but as ionic radical polymerization initiators.
  • The onium salts that may be preferably used are those represented by the following general formulas (RI-I) to (RI-III).

             Ar11-N+=N     (RI-I)

             Z11-

             Ar21-I+-Ar22     (RI-II)

             Z21-

    Figure imgb0008
  • In the formula (RI-I), Ar11 is an aryl group of up to 20 carbon atoms which may have 1 to 6 substituents. Referred substituents include alkyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkenyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkynyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, aryl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkoxy groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, aryloxy groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, halogen atoms, alkylamino groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, dialkylamino groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkylamide or arylamide groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, carbonyl group, carboxy group, cyano group, sulfonyl group, thioalkyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms and thioaryl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Z11- is a monovalent anion, specific examples of which include halide ions (e.g., Cl- and Br-), perchlorate ion (ClO4 -), hexafluorophosphate ion (PF6 -), tetrafluoroborate ion (BF4 -), sulfonate ion, sulfinate ion, thiosulfonate ion and sulfate ion. Of these, perchlorate ion, hexafluorophosphate ion, tetrafluoroborate ion, sulfonate ion and sulfinate ion are preferred for good stability.
  • In the formula (RI-II), Ar21 and Ar22 are each independently an aryl group of up to 20 carbon atoms which may have 1 to 6 substituents. Preferred substituents include alkyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkenyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkynyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, aryl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkoxy groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, aryloxy groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, halogen atoms, alkylamino groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, dialkylamino groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkylamide or arylamide groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, carbonyl group, carboxy group, cyano group, sulfonyl group, thioalkyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms and thioaryl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Z21- is a monovalent anion, specific examples of which include halide ions (e.g., Cl- and Br-), perchlorate ion (ClO4 -), hexafluorophosphate ion (PF6 -), tetrafluoroborate ion (BF4 -), sulfonate ion, sulfinate ion, thiosulfonate ion and sulfate ion. Of these, perchlorate ion, hexafluorophosphate ion., tetrafluoroborate ion, sulfonate ion, sulfinate ion and carboxylate ion are preferred for good stability and reactivity.
  • In the formula (RI-III), R31, R32 and R33 are each independently an aryl, alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl group of up to 20 carbon atoms which may have 1 to 6 substituents. Of these, aryl groups are preferred for good reactivity and stability. Preferred substituents include alkyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkenyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkynyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, aryl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkoxy groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, aryloxy groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, halogen atoms, alkylamino groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, dialkylamino groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, alkylamide or arylamide groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, carbonyl group, carboxy group, cyano group, sulfonyl group, thioalkyl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms and thioaryl groups of 1 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Z31- is a monovalent anion, specific examples of which include halide ions (e.g., Cl- and Br-), perchlorate ion (ClO4 -), hexafluorophosphate ion (PF6 -), tetrafluoroborate ion (BF4 -), sulfonate ion, sulfinate ion, thiosulfonate ion and sulfate ion. Of these, perchlorate ion, hexafluorophosphate ion, tetrafluoroborate ion, sulfonate ion, sulfinate ion and carboxylate ion are preferred for good stability and reactivity. The carboxylate ion mentioned in JP 2001-343742 A is more preferred, and the carboxylate ion mentioned in JP 2002-148790 A is most preferred.
  • Examples of the onium salts that may be advantageously used for the polymerization initiator are shown below but the invention is not limited to these compounds.
    Figure imgb0009
    Figure imgb0010


             PF6 -     (N-3)

    Figure imgb0011
    Figure imgb0012
    Figure imgb0013
    Figure imgb0014
    Figure imgb0015
    Figure imgb0016
    Figure imgb0017
    Figure imgb0018
    Figure imgb0019
    Figure imgb0020


             PF6 -     (I-2)

    Figure imgb0021


             ClO4 -     (I-4)

    Figure imgb0022
    Figure imgb0023


             CF3SO3 -     (I-7)

    Figure imgb0024
    Figure imgb0025


             PF6 -     (I-10)

    Figure imgb0026
    Figure imgb0027
    Figure imgb0028


             ClO4 -     (I-14)

             PF6 -     (I-15)

    Figure imgb0029


             CF3COO-     (I-17)

             CF3SO3 -     (I-18)

    Figure imgb0030
    Figure imgb0031
    Figure imgb0032
    Figure imgb0033
    Figure imgb0034
    Figure imgb0035
    Figure imgb0036


             PF6 -     (1-28)

             C4F9SO3 -     (I-29)

    Figure imgb0037
    Figure imgb0038
    Figure imgb0039
    Figure imgb0040


             PF6 -     (S-2)

             ClO4 -     (S-3)

    Figure imgb0041
    Figure imgb0042


             CF3SO3 -     (S-6)

    Figure imgb0043
    Figure imgb0044
    Figure imgb0045
    Figure imgb0046
    Figure imgb0047
    Figure imgb0048


             BF4 -     (S-15)

    Figure imgb0049
    Figure imgb0050
    Figure imgb0051
  • These polymerization initiators may be added in a proportion, based on all the solid ingredients making up the image recording layer, of 0.1 to 50 wt%, preferably 0.5 to 30 wt%, and more preferably 1 to 20 wt%.
  • An excellent sensitivity and a high resistance to scumming in non-image areas during printing are achieved at a polymerisation initiator content within the above-defined range. These polymerization initiators may be used singly or in combination of two or more thereof. These polymerization initiators may be added to the layer that includes the other ingredients or may be added to a separately provided layer.
  • (Polymerizable Compounds)
  • Polymerizable compounds are addition Polymerizable compounds having at least one ethylenically unsaturated double bond, and are selected from compounds having at least one, and preferably two or more, terminal ethylenically unsaturated bonds.
  • In the invention, use can be made of any addition polymerizable compound known in the prior art, without particular limitation. Such compounds have a variety of chemical forms, including monomers, prepolymers such as dimers, trimers and oligomers, mixtures of any of the above, and copolymers of any of the above.
  • The monomers and copolymers are exemplified by unsaturated carboxylic acids (e.g., acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid) and esters and amides thereof. Of these, it is preferable to use an ester of an unsaturated carboxylic acid with an aliphatic polyol or an amide of an unsaturated carboxylic acid with an aliphatic polyamine compound.
  • Preferred use can also be made of the addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a nucleophilic substituent such as a hydroxy, amino or mercapto group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanate or epoxy compound; the dehydration condensation reaction product of the foregoing ester or amide with a monofunctional or polyfunctional carboxylic acid; the addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having an electrophilic substituent such as an isocyanate or epoxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol; or the substitution reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide having a removable substituent such as a halogen atom or a tosyloxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol.
  • Moreover, use can also be made of compound groups in which a suitable compound such as unsaturated phosphonic acid, styrene or vinyl ether is substituted for the above-mentioned unsaturated carboxylic acid.
  • Illustrative examples of monomers which are esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyol compounds include acrylic acid esters, methacrylic acid esters, itaconic acid esters, crotonic acid esters, isocrotonic acid esters and maleic acid esters. Specific examples of acrylic acid esters include ethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, 1,3-butanediol diacrylate, tetramethylene glycol diacrylate, propylene glycol diacrylate, neopentyl glycol diacrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, trimethylolpropane tri(acryloyloxypropyl)ether, trimethylolethane triacrylate, hexanediol diacrylate, 1,4-cyclohexanediol diacrylate, tetraethylene glycol diacrylate, pentaerythritol diacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, dipentaerythritol diacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, sorbitol triacrylate, sorbitol tetraacrylate, sorbitol pentaacrylate, sorbitol hexaacrylate, tri(acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate, polyester acrylate oligomer and isocyanuric acid ethylene oxide-modified triacrylate.
  • Specific examples of methacrylic acid esters include tetramethylene glycol dimethacrylate, triethylene glycol dimethacrylate, neopentyl glycol dimethacrylate, trimethylolpropane trimethacrylate, trimethylilethane trimethacrylate, ethylene glycol dimethacrylate, 1,3-butanediol dimethacrylate, hexanediol dimethacrylate, pentaerythritol dimethacrylate, pentaerythritol trimethacrylate, pentaerythritol tetramethacrylate, dipentaerythritol dimethacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, sorbitol trimethacrylate, sorbitol tetramethacrylate, bis[p-(3-methacryloxy-2-hydroxypropoxy)phenyl]dimethylmethane and bis[p-(methacryloxyethoxy)phenyl]dimethylmethane.
  • Itaconic acid esters include ethylene glycol diitaconate, propylene glycol diitaconate, 1,3-butanediol diitaconate, 1,4-butanediol diitaconate, tetramethylene glycol diitaconate, pentaerythritol diitaconate and sorbitol tetraitaconate.
  • Crotonic acid esters include ethylene glycol dicrotonate, tetramethylene glycol dicrotonate, pentaerythritol dicrotonate and sorbitol tetradicrotonate.
  • Isocrotonic acid esters include ethylene glycol diisocrotonate, pentaerythritol diisocrotonate and sorbitol tetraisocrotonate.
  • Maleic acid esters include ethylene glycol dimaleate, triethylene glycol dimaleate, pentaerythritol dimaleate and sorbitol tetramaleate.
  • Preferred examples of other esters include the aliphatic alcohol esters mentioned in JP 51-47334 B and JP 57-196231 A ; esters having aromatic skeletons such as those mentioned in JP 59-5240 A , JP 59-5241 A and JP 2-226149 A ; and the amino group-bearing esters mentioned in JP 1-165613 A . In addition, the above-described ester monomers may be used in the form of a mixture.
  • Specific examples of amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids with aliphatic polyamines that may be used as monomers include methylenebis(acrylamide), methylenebis(methacrylamide), 1,6-hexamethylenebis(acrylamide), 1,6-hexamethylenebis(methacrylamide), diethylenetriaminetris(acrylamide), xylylenebis(acrylamide) and xylylenebis(methacrylamide).
  • Other suitable amide-type monomers include those having a cyclohexylene structure which are mentioned in JP 54-21726 B .
  • Urethane-type addition polymerizable compounds prepared using an addition reaction between an isocyanate group and a hydroxy group are also suitable. Specific examples include the vinylurethane compounds having two or more polymerizable vinyl groups per molecule that are obtained by adding a hydroxy group-bearing vinyl monomer of the general formula (A) below to the polyisocyanste compounds having two or more isocyanate groups per molecule mentioned in JP 48-41708 B .

             CH2=C(R4)COOCH2CH(R5)OH     (A)

    In the formula (A), R4 and R5 each independently represent H or CH3.
  • Urethane acrylates such as those mentioned in JP 51-37193 A , JP 2-32293 B and JP 2-16765 B , and the urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide-type skeleton mentioned in JP 58-49860 B , JP 56-17654 B , JP 62-39417 B and JP 62-39418 B are also suitable.
  • Other polymerizable compounds that may be used in the invention include the addition polymerizable compounds having in the molecule an amino structure or a sulfide structure that are mentioned in UP 63-277653 A, JP 63-260909 A and JP 1-105238 A . By using such addition Polymerizable compounds, photopolymerizable compositions of exceptional sensitivity (speed) can be obtained.
  • Other polymerizable compounds that can be used in the invention include polyfunctional acrylates and methacrylates, such as the polyester acrylates mentioned in JP 48-64183 A , JP 49-43191 B and JP 52-30490 B , and epoxy acrylates obtained by reacting an epoxy resin with (meth)acrylic acid.
  • Further example include the specific unsaturated compounds mentioned in JP 46-43946 B , JP 1-40337 B and JP 1-40336 B , and the vinylphotphonic acid compounds mentioned in JP 2-25493 A .
  • In some cases, it will be desirable to use the perfluoroalkyl group-containing structures mentioned in JP 61-22048 A .
  • Use can also be made of the photocurable monomers and oligomers mentioned in Nippon Setchaku Kyokaishi, Vol. 20, No. 7, 300-308 (1984).
  • Details concerning use of the addition polymerizable compound, for example, what type of structure it should have, whether to use one such compound alone or a combination of two or more thereof, and the amount of addition can be selected as desired in accordance with the performance characteristics ultimately intended for the presensitized plate. For example, selection may be based on the following criteria.
  • For good sensitivity, a structure having a high unsaturated group content per molecule is preferred. In most cases, a functionality of at least two is desirable. To increase the strength of image areas (i.e., the cured film), a functionally of three or more is preferred. Also effective are methods in which both the sensitivity and strength are adjusted by using in combination compounds having differing numbers of functional groups or differing polymerizable groups (e.g., acrylic acid esters, methacrylic acid esters, styrene compounds, vinyl ether compounds).
  • Selection of the addition polymerizable compound and how it is used are also important factors affecting both the compatibility and dispersibility of the compound with respect to other ingredients in the image recording layer (e.g., binder polymers, initiators, colorants). For instance, sometimes the compatibility can be enhanced by using a low-purity compound or by using together two or more addition polymerizable compounds.
  • The addition, polymerizable compound is added in a proportion, with respect to the nonvolatile ingredients in the image recording layer of preferably 5 to 80 wt%, and more preferably 25 to 75 wt%. These addition polymerizable compounds may be used singly or in combination of two or more thereof. In addition, as for how the addition polymerizable compound is used, suitable structure, formulation and amount of addition may be arbitrarily selected from the viewpoints of the degree of polymerization inhibited by oxygen, resolution, fogging, changes in refractive index, and surface adhesiveness, and the arrangement of layers such as undercoat and topcoat and their coating method may optionally be carried out.
  • (Finely Divided Polymer Particles Having Polymerizable Reactive Group)
  • In the practice of the invention, the image recording layer preferably contains finely divided polymer particles having a polymerizable reactive group in addition to the above-described infrared absorber, polymerisation initiator and polymerizable compound.
  • Exemplary finely divided polymer particles having a polymerizable reactive group include ones obtained by introducing a monomer having acryloyl group, methacryloyl group, vinyl group or allyl group into the polymer chain. These functional groups may be introduced into the finely divided polymer particles during polymerization or following polymerisation by the use of a polymer reaction.
  • In the case of introduction during polymerization, a monomer having any of these polymerizable reactive groups is preferably subjected to emulsion polymerization, suspension polymerization, urethanization or other polycondensation reaction. A monomer having no polymerizable reactive group may optionally be added as a copolymerization ingredient.
  • Illustrative examples of monomers having such functional groups include, but are not limited to, allyl methacrylate, allyl acrylate, vinyl methacrylate, vinyl acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, glycidyl acrylate, 2-isocyanate ethyl methaerylate, 2-isocyanate ethyl acrylate, 2-aminoethyl methaccylate, 2-aminoethyl acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl mcthacrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, maleic anhydride, bifunctional acrylate and difunctional methacrylate.
  • An Exemplary polymer reaction that may be used in cases where the polymerizable reactive functional groups are introduced following polymerization includes one described in WO 96-034316 .
  • The polymerizable reactive group-containing finely divided polymer particles may coalesce together by the influence of heat.
  • It is particularly preferable for the finely divided polymer particles to have each a hydrophilic surface and disperse in water. In order to make the surfaces of the finely divided polymer particles hydrophilic, polyvinyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol or other hydrophilic polymer or oligomer, or a hydrophilic low molecular weight compound is adsorbed on the surfaces of the finely divided polymer particles, but this is not the sole method of the invention.
  • The finely divided polymer particles preferably have an average particle size of 0.01 to 10 µm, more preferably 0.05 to 2 µm, and most preferably 0.1 to 1 µm. The resolution is lowered at a too large average particle size whereas the stability is impaired over time at a too small average particle size.
  • The finely divided polymer particles having a polymerizable reactive group may be used in the form of microcapsules or microgels that include a polymerizable reactive group-bearing compound with which no covalent bond is formed.
  • In other words, the invention is capable of using several embodiments depending on the methods of incorporating the constituents of the image recording layer into the image recording layer.
  • One is a molecular dispersion type image recording layer formed by a method as described in JP 2002-287334 A which involves dissolving the constituents in a suitable solvent and applying the resulting solution onto the support.
  • Another embodiment is a microcapsule type image recording layer formed by a method as described in JP 2001-277740 A or JP 2001-277742 A which involves including all or some of the constituents in microcapsules and incorporating the microcapsules into the image recording layer. The microcapsule type image recording layer may also contain the constituents outside the microcapsules. In a preferred embodiment, the microcapsule type image recording layer contains hydrophobic constituents in the microcapsules and hydrophilic constituents outside the microcapsules. In order to achieve better on-machine developability, the image recording layer is preferably a microcapsule type image recording layer.
  • The finely divided polymer particles having a polymerizable reactive group that may be used in the invention are in the form of microcapsules or microgels which include a polymerizable reactive group-bearing compound. The above-described polymerizable compounds may be used without any limitation for the Polymerizable reactive group-bearing compound.
  • Known methods may be used for microencapsulating the constituents of the image recording layer. Illustrative examples include the methods involving the use of coacetvation described in US 2,800,457 and US 2,800,458 ; the methods that relay on interfacial polymerization described in US 3,287,154 , JP 38-19574 B and J? 42-446 B ; the methods involving polymer precipitation described in us 3,418,250 and US 3,660,304 ; the method that uses an isocyanate polyol wall material described in US 3,796,669 ; the method that uses an isocyanate wall material described in US 3,914,511 ; the methods that use a ureaformaldehyde or urea formaldehyde-resorcinol wall-forming material which are described in US 4,001,140 , 4,087,376 and 4,089,802 ; the method which uses wall materials such as melamine-formaldehyde resins and hydroxycellulose that is described in US 4,025,445 ; the in situ methods involving monomer polymerization that are taught in JP 36-9163 B and JP 51-9079 B ; the spray drying processes described in GB 930,422 B and US 3,111,407 ; and the electrolytic dispersion cooling processes described in GB 952,807 B and GB 967,074 B .
  • Microcapsule walls preferred for use in this invention are those which have three-dimensional crosslinkages and are solvent-swellable. Accordingly, it is preferable for the microcapsule wall material to be selected from the group consisting of polyurea, polyurethane, polyester, polycarbonate, polyamide and a mixture thereof. Polyurea and polyurethane are especially preferred. The microcapsule wall may include therein the polymerizable reactive group-bearing compound.
  • The microcapsule is preferably one having an average particle size of 0.01 to 10 µm, more preferably 0.05 to 2 µm, and most preferably 0.1 to 1 µm. The resolution is lowered at a too large average particle size whereas the stability is impaired over time at a too small average particle size.
  • Such microcapsule may or may not coalesce together by the influence of heat.
  • (Binder Polymer)
  • In the practice of the invention, use may be mode of a binder polymer in the image recording layer in order to improve the film forming properties of the image recording layer.
  • Conventionally known binder polymers may be used without any particular limitation and polymers having film forming properties are preferred. Examples of such binder polymers include acrylic resins, polyvinyl acetal resins, polyurethane resin, polyurea resins, polyimide resins, polyamide resins, epoxy resins, methacrylic resins, polystyrene resins, novolac phenolic resins, polyester resins, synthetic rubbers and natural rubbers.
  • Crosslinkability may be imparted to the binder polymer to enhance the film strength in image areas. To impart crosslinkability to the binder polymer, a crosslinkable functional group such as an ethylenically unsaturated bond may be introduced into the polymer main chain or side chain. The crosslinkable functional groups may be introduced by copolymerization.
  • Exemplary polymers having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the main chain of the molecule include poly-1,4-butadiene and poly-1,4-isoprene.
  • Exemplary polymers having an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the side chain of the molecule include polymers of esters or amides of acrylic acid or methacrylic acid, in which polymers the ester or amide residue (R in -COOR or -CONHR) has an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • Exemplary residues (the above-mentioned R) having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include -(CH2)nCR2=CR2R3, - (CH2O)nCH2CR1=CR2R3, -(CH2CH2O)nCH2CR1=CR2R3, -(CH2)nNH-CO-O-CH2CR1=CR2R3, -(CH2)n-O-CO-CR1=C2R3 and -(CH2CH2O)2-X (wherein each of R1 to R3 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl, aryl, alkoxy or aryloxy group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and R1 and R2 or R3 may be bonded together to form a ring; the letter n is an integer from 1 to 10; and x is a dicyclopentadienyl residue).
  • Specific examples of suitable ester residues include - CH2CH-CH2 (mentioned in JP 7-21633 B ), -CH2CH2O-CH2CH=CH2, - CH2C(CH3)=CH2, -CH2CH=CH-C6H5, -CH2CH2OCOCH=CH-C6H5, -CH2CR2-NHCOO-CH2CF=CH2 and -CH2CH2O-X (wherein X is a dicyclopentadienyl residue).
  • Specific examples of suitable amide residues include - CH2CH=CH2, -CH2CH2O -Y (wherein Y is a cyclohexene residue) and - CH2CH2-OCO-CH=CH2.
  • The binder polymer having crosslinkability is cured by, for example, the addition of free radicals (polymerization initiating radicals, or propagation radicals during polymerization of the polymerizable compound) to the crosslinkable functional groups on the polymer to effect addition polymerization, either directly between polymers or via chain polymerization of the polymerisable compounds, so as to form crosslinks between the polymer molecules. Alternatively, the binder polymer having crosslinkability is cured when atoms in the polymer (e.g., hydrogen atoms on carbon atoms adjacent to the crosslinkable functional groups) are pulled off by free radicals, thereby forming polymer radicals which bond together, resulting in the formation of crosslinks between the polymer molecules.
  • The crosslinkable group content in the binder polymer (content of radical-polymerizable unsaturated double bonds, as determined by iodometry) is preferably 0.1 to 10.0 mmol, more preferably 1.0 to 7.0 mmol, and most preferably 2.0 to 5.5 mmol, per gram of the binder polymer. Good sensitivity and storage stability are achieved at a crosslinkable group content within the above-defined range.
  • In terms of improving the on-machine developability in unexposed portions of the image recording layer, the binder polymer preferably has a high solubility or dispersibility in ink and/or fountain solution. Lipophilic binder polymers are preferred in order to improve the solubility or dispersibility in ink, but hydrophilic binder polymers are preferred in order to improve the solubility or dispersibility in fountain solution. To this end, it is also effective in the invention to use a lipophilic binder polymer and a hydrophilic binder polymer in combination.
  • Suitable examples of hydrophilic binder polymers include those having hydrophilic groups, such as hydroxy, carboxy, carboxylate, hydroxyethyl, polyoxyethyl, hydroxypropyl, polyoxypropyl, amino, aminoethyl, aminopropyl, ammonium, amide, carboxymethyl, sulfonate and phosphate groups.
  • Specific examples include gum arabic, casein, gelatin, starch derivatives, carboxymethyl cellulose and its sodium salt, cellulose acetate, sodium alginate, vinyl acetate-maleic acid copolymers styrene-maleic acid copolymers, polyacrylic acids and their salts, polymethacrylic acids and their salts, homopolymers and copolymers of hydroxyethyl methacrylate, homopolymers and copolymers of hydroxyethyl acrylate, homopolymers and copolymers of hydroxypropyl methacrylate, homopolymers and copolymers of hydroxypropyl acrylate, homopolymers and copolymers of hydroxybutyl methacrylate, homopolymers and copolymers of hydroxybutyl acrylate, polyethylene glycols, hydroxypropylene polymers, polyvinyl alcohols, hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetates having a degree of hydrolysis of at least 60 mol%, and preferably at least 80 mol%, polyvinyl formal, polyvinyl butyral, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, acrylamide homopolymers and copolymers, methacrylamide homopolymers and copolymers, N-methylolacrylamide homopolymers and copolymers, polyvinylpyrrolidones, alcohol-soluble nylons, and polyethers of 2,2-bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)propane with epichlorohydrin.
  • The binder polymer has a weight-average molecular weight of preferably at least 5,000, and more preferably from 10,000 to 300,000, and has a number-average molecular weight of preferably at least 1,000, and more preferably from 2,000 to 250,000. The polydispersity (weight-average molecular weight/number-average molecular weight) is preferably from 1.1 to 10.
  • The binder polymer may be synthesized by any method known in the art. Examples of the solvent that may be used in the synthesis include tetrahydrofuran, ethylene dichloride, cyclohexanone, methyl ethyl ketone, acetone, methanol, ethanol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, 2-methoxyethyl acetate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, toluene, ethyl acetate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, dimethylsulfoxide, and water. These may be used alone or as mixtures of two or more thereof.
  • Known compounds such as azo initiators and peroxide initiators may be used for the radical polymerization initiator employed in synthesizing the binder polymer.
  • The content of the binder polymer is from 5 to 90 wt%, preferably from 5 to 80 wt% and more preferably from 10 to 70 wt% based on all the solid ingredients of the image recording layer. A high strength in image areas and good image forming properties are achieved at a binder polymer content within the above-defined range.
  • The polymerizable compound and the binder polymer are preferably used in a weight ratio of 0.5/1 to 4/1.
  • (Surfactant)
  • In the practice of the invention, a surfactant is preferably used in the image recording layer in order to promote the on-machine developability at the start of printing and improve the coating surface shape.
  • Exemplary surfactants include nonionic surfactants, anionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, amphoteric surfactants and fluorochemical surfactants. Use may be made of a single surfactant or of a combination of two or more surfactants.
  • Any known nonionic surfactant may be used without particular limitation. Specific examples include polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ethers, polyoxyethylene polystyrylphenyl ethers, polyoxyethylene polyoxypropylene alkyl ethers, partial fatty acid esters of glycerol, partial fatty acid esters of sorbitan, partial fatty acid esters of pentaerythritol, fatty acid monoesters of propylene glycol, partial fatty acid esters of sucrose, partial fatty acid esters of polyoxyethylene sorbitan, partial fatty acid esters of polyoxyethylene sorbitol, fatty acid esters of polyethylene glycol, partial fatty acid esters of polyglycerol, polyoxyethylenated castor oils, partial fatty acid esters of polyoxyethylene glycerol, fatty acid diethanolamides, N,N-bis-2-hydroxyalkylamines, polyoxyethylene alkyl amines, fatty acid esters of triethanolamine, trialkylamine oxides, polyethylene glycol, and copolymers of polyethylene glycol and polypropylene glycol.
  • Any known anionic surfactant may be used without particular limitation. Specific examples include fatty acid salts, abietic acid salts, hydroxyalkanesulfonates, alkanesulfonates, dialkylsulfosuccinates, linear alkylbenzenesulfonates, branched alkylbenzenesulfonates, alkylnaphthalenesulfonates, alkylphenoxypolyoxyethylene propylsulfonates, polyoxyethylene alkylsulfophenyl ether salts, sodium N-methyl-N-oleyltaurate, the disodium salts of N-alkylsulfosuccinic acid monoamides, petroleum sulfonates, sulfated tallow oil, sulfates of fatty acid alkyl esters, alkyl sulfates, polyoxyethylene alkyl ether sulfates, fatty acid monoglyceride sulfates, polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ether sulfates, polyoxyethylene styrylphenyl ether sulfates, alkyl phosphates, polyoxyethylene alkyl ether phosphates, polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ether phosphates, partially saponified styrene-maleic anhydride copolymers, partially saponified olefin-maleic anhydride copolymers and naphthalenesulfonate-formalin condensates.
  • Any known cationic surfactant may be used without particular limitation. Examples include alkylamine salts, quaternary ammonium salts, polyoxyethylene alkylamine salts and polyethylene polyamine derivatives.
  • Any known amphoteric surfactant may be used without particular limitation. Examples include carboxybetaines, aminocarboxylic acids, sulfobetaines, aminosulfates and imidazolines.
  • In the surfactants mentioned above, the term "polyoxyethylene" may be substituted with the more general term "polyoxyalkylene," additional examples of which include polyoxymethylene, polyoxypropylene and polyoxybutylene. Surfactants containing these latter polyoxyalkylene groups can likewise be used in the present invention.
  • Fluorochemical surfactants having perfluoroalkyl groups in the molecule are also suitable as the surfactant.
  • Examples of such fluorochemical surfactants include anionic surfactants such as perfluoroalkylcarboxylates, perfluoroalkylsulfonates and perfluoroalkylphosphates; amphoteric surfactants such as perfluoroalkylbetaine; cationic surfactants such as perfluoroalkyltrimethylammonium salts; and nonionic surfactants such as perfluoroalkylamine oxides, perfluoroalkyl-ethylene oxide adducts, oligomers containing perfluoroalkyl groups and hydrophilic groups, oligomers containing perfluoroalkyl groups and lipophilic groups, oligomers containing perfluoroalkyl groups, hydrophilic groups and lipophilic groups, and urethanes containing perfluoroalkyl groups and lipophilic groups. Preferred examples include the fluorochemical surfactants mentioned in JP 62-170950 A , JP 62-226143 A and JP 60-168144 A .
  • Use may be made of a single surfactant or of a combination of two or more surfactants.
  • The content of the surfactant is preferably from 0.001 to 10 wt% and more preferably from 0.01 to 5 wt% based on the total solids in the image recording layer.
  • (Colorant)
  • In the practice of the invention, various other compounds than those mentioned above may optionally be added to the image recording layer. For example, dyes having a large absorption in the visible light range can be used as image colorants. Specific examples include Oil Yellow #101, Oil Yellow #103, oil Pink #312, Oil Green BG, Oil Blue BOS, Oil Blue #603, Oil Black BY, Oil Black BS and Oil Black T-505 (all of which are produced by Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.); and also Victoria Pure Blue, Crystal Violet (CI 42555), Methyl Violet (CI 42535), Ethyl Violet, Rhodamine B (CI 145170B), Malachite Green (CI 42000), Methylene Blue (CI 52015), and the dyes mentioned in JP 62-293247 A . Preferred use can also be made of pigments such as phthalocyanine pigments, azo pigments, carbon black and titanium oxide.
  • The addition of these colorants is desirable because they enable image areas and non-image areas to be easily distinguished from each other following image formation. The amount of colorant added to the image recording layer is 0.01 to 10 wt%, based on the total solids in the image recording layer. (Printing-Out Agent)
  • In the practice of the invention, an acid or radical-responsive chromogenic compound may be added to the image recording layer in order to form a print-out image.
  • Examples of compounds that may be effectively used include diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, thiazine, oxazine, xanthene, anthraquinone, iminoquinone, azo and azomethine dyes.
  • Specific examples include dyes such as Brilliant Green, Ethyl Violet, Methyl Green, Crystal Violet, Basic Fuchsin, Methyl Violet 2B, Quinaldine Red, Rose Bengal, Metanil Yellow, Thymolsulfophthalein, Xylenol Blue, Methyl Orange, Paramethyl Red, Congo Red, Benzopurpurin 4B, α-Naphthyl Red, Nile Blue 2B, Nile Blue A, Methyl Violet, Malachite Green, Parafuchsin, Victoria Pure Blue BOH (produced by Hodogaya Chemical Co., Ltd.), Oil Blue #603 (Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Oil Pink #312 (Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Oil Red 5B (Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Oil Scarlet #308 (Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Oil Red OG (Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Oil Red RR (Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Oil Green #502 (Orient Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Spiron Red BEH Special (Hodogaya Chemical Co., Ltd.), m-Cresol Purple, Cresol Red, Rhodamine B, Rhodamine 6G, Sulforhodamine B, Auramine, 4-p-diethylaminophenyliminonaphthoquinone, 2-carboxyanilino-4-p-diethylaminophenyliminonaphthoquinone, 2-carboxystearylamino-4-p-N,N-bis(hydroxyethyl)aminophenyliminonaphthoquinone, 1-phenyl-3-methyl-4-p-diethylaminophenylimino-5-pyrazolone and 1-β-naphthyl-4-p-diethylaminophenylimino-5-pyrazolone; and leuco dyes such as p,p',p"-hexamethyltriaminotriphenylmethane (Leuco Crystal Violet) and Pergascript Blue SRB (Ciba Geigy).
  • In addition to the above, leuco dyes known to be used in heat-sensitive or pressure-sensitive paper may also be advantageously used as a printing-out agent. Specific examples include Crystal Violet Lactone, Malachite Green Lactone, Benzoyl Leucomethylene Blue, 2-(N-phenyl-N-methylamino)-6-(N-p-tolyl-N-ethyl)aminofluoran, 2-anilino-3-methyl-6-(N-ethyl-p-toluidino)fluoran, 3,6-dimethoxyfluoran, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-5-methyl-7-(N,N-dibenzylamino)fluoran, 3-(N-cyclohexyl-N-methylamino)-6-methyl-7-anilinofluoran, 3- (N,N-diethylamino) -6-methyl-7-anilinofluoran, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-6-methyl-7-xylidinofluoran, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-6-methyl-7-chlorofluoran, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-6-methoxy-7-aminofluoran, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-7-(4-chloroanilino)fluoran, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-7-chlorofluoran, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-7-benzylaminofluoran, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)-7,8-benzofluoran, 3-(N,N-dibutylamino)-6-methyl-7-anilinofluoran, 3-(N,N-dibutylamino)-6-methyl-7-xylidinofluoran, 3-piperidino-6-methyl-7-anilinofluoran, 3-pyrrolidino-6-methyl-7-anilinofluoran, 3,3-bis(1-ethyl-2-methylindol-3-yl)phthalide, 3,3-bis(1-n-butyl-2-methylindol-3-yl)phthalide, 3,3-bis(p-dimethylaminophenyl)-6-dimethylaminophthalide, 3-(4-diethylamino-2-ethoxyphenyl)-3-(1-ethyl-2-methylindol-3-yl)-4-azaphthalide and 3-(4-diethylaminophenyl)-3-(1-ethyl-2-methylindol-3-yl)phthalide.
  • The acid or radical-responsive chromogenic dye is preferably added in an amount of 0.01 to 10 wt% based on the solids in the image recording layer.
  • (Polymerization Inhibitor)
  • In the practice of the invention, to prevent unwanted thermal polymerization of the radical polymerizable compound during production or storage of the image recording layer, it is desirable to add a small amount of a thermal polymerization inhibitor to the image recording layer.
  • Preferred examples of the thermal polymerization inhibitor include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4'-thiobis(3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), 2,2'-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol) and aluminum M-nitroso-N-phenylhydroxylamine. The amount of thermal polymerization inhibitor added to the image recording layer is preferably from about 0.01 wt% to about 5 wt%, based on the total solids in the image recording layer.
  • (Higher Fatty Acid Derivative)
  • In the practice of the invention, to prevent oxygen from inhibiting polymerization, a higher fatty acid derivative such as behenic acid or behenamide may be added to the image recording layer and induced to concentrate primarily at the surface of the image recording layer as the layer dries after coating. The higher fatty acid derivative is preferably added to the image recording layer in an amount of about 0.1 wt% to about 10 wt%, based on the total solids in the image recording layer. (Plasticizer)
  • In the invention, the image recording layer may contain a plasticizer in order to improved the on-machine developability.
  • Preferred examples of the plasticizer include phthalic acid esters such as dimethyl phthalate, diethyl phthalate, dibutyl phthalate, diisobutyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, octylcapryl phthalate, dicyclohexyl phthalate, ditridecyl phthalate, butylbenzyl phthalate, diisodecyl phthalate and diallyl phthalate; glycol esters such as dimethyl glycol phthalate, ethyl phthalyl ethyl glycolate, methyl phthalyl ethyl glycolate, butyl phthalyl butyl glycolate, and triethylene glycol dicaprylate; phosphoric acid esters such as tricresyl phosphate and triphenyl phosphate; dibasic fatty acid esters such as diisobutyl adipate, dioctyl adipate, dimethyl sebacate, dibutyl sebacate, dioctyl azelate and dibutyl maleate; and polyglycidyl methacrylate, triethyl citrate, triacetyl glycerine and butyl laurate.
  • The plasticizer content is preferably not more than about 30 wt%, based on the total solids in the image recording layer.
  • (Fine Inorganic Particles)
  • In the invention, the image recording layer may contain fine inorganic particles to improve the strength of the cured film in image areas and the on-machine developability in non-image areas.
  • Preferred examples of fine inorganic particles include silica, alumina, magnesium oxide, titanium oxide, magnesium carbonate, calcium alginate, and mixtures thereof. Even if such particles do not convert light to heat, they can be used for such purposes as strengthening the film and strengthening interfacial adhesion due to surface roughening.
  • The fine inorganic particles have an average size of preferably 5 nm to 10. µm, and more preferably 0.5 µm to 3 µm. Within this range, they disperse stably in the image recording layer, enabling the image recording layer to maintain a sufficient degree of film strength and enabling the formation of non-image areas having excellent hydrophilic properties that are not prone to scumming during printing.
  • Fine inorganic particles of this type are readily available as commercial products, such as in the form of colloidal silica dispersions.
  • The content of these fine inorganic particles is preferably not more than 40 wt% and more preferably not more than 30 wt% based on the total solids in the image recording layer.
  • (Low-Molecular-Weight Hydrophilic Compound)
  • In the invention, to improve the on-machine developability, the image recording layer may contain a low-molecular-weight hydrophilic compound.
  • Illustrative examples of suitable low-molecular-weight hydrophilic compounds include the following water-soluble organic compounds: glycols such as ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, propylene glycol, dipropylene glycol and tripropylene glycol, as well as ether or ester derivatives thereof; polyhydroxy compounds such as glycerol and pentaerythritol; organic amines such as triethanolamine, diethanolamine and monoethanolamine, as well as salts thereof; organic sulfonic acids such as toluenesulfonic acid and benzenesulfonic acid, as well as salts thereof; organic phosphonic acids such as phenylphosphonic acid, as well as salts thereof; and organic carboxylic acids such as tartaric acid, oxalic acid, citric acid, malic acid, lactic acid, gluconic acid and amino acids, as well as salts thereof.
  • [Formation of Image Recording Layer]
  • The image recording layer is formed by dispersing or dissolving the necessary ingredients described above in a solvent to prepare a coating fluid and applying the thus prepared coating fluid to the support. Specific examples of the solvent include, but are not limited to, ethylene dichloride, cyclohexanone, methyl ethyl ketone, methanol, ethanol, propanol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 2-methoxyethyl acetate, 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, dimethoxyethane, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N,N-dimethylformamide, tetramethylurea, N-methylpyrrolidone, dimethylsulfoxide, sulfolane, γ-butyrolactone, toluene and water.
  • These solvents may be used alone or as mixtures of two or more thereof. The coating fluid has a solids concentration of preferably 1 to 50 wt%.
  • The image recording layer can also be formed by dispersing or dissolving the same or different ingredients in the same or different solvents to prepare a plurality of coating fluids, applying the prepared coating fluids a plurality of times, and repeatedly drying.
  • The image recording layer coating weight (solids content) on the support obtained after coating and drying varies depending on the intended application, although an amount of 0.3 to 3.0 g/m2 is generally preferred. At an image recording layer coating weight within this range, a good sensitivity and good image recording layer film properties are obtained.
  • Any of various coating methods may be used. Examples of suitable methods of coating include bar coating, spin coating, spray coating, curtain coating, dip coating, air knife coating, blade coating and roll coating.
  • [Undercoat]
  • In the presensitized plate of the invention, it is desirable to provide an undercoat between the image recording layer and the lithographic printing plate support.
  • (Polymer Having Substrate Adsorbable Group, Polymerizable Group and Hydrophilic Group)
  • In the practice of the invention, the undercoat preferably contains a polymer having a substrate adsorbable group, a polymerizable group and a hydrophilic group.
  • An example of the polymer having a substrate adsorbable group, a polymerizable group and a hydrophilic group includes an undercoating polymer resin obtained by copolymerizing an adsorbable group-bearing monomer, a hydrophilic group-bearing monomer and a polymerizable reactive group (crosslinkable group)-bearing monomer.
  • One of the essential ingredients of the polymer resin is an adsorbable group on the substrate (the hydrophilic support surface). Whether or not a group is adsorbable on the hydrophilic support surface can be determined by, for example, the method as described below.
  • A test compound is dissolved in a readily-soluble solvent to prepare a coating solution, which is applied onto a support, then dried so as to obtain a coating weight after drying of 30 mg/m2. Next, the support onto which the test compound has been applied is thoroughly cleaned with a readily-soluble solvent, after which the amount of the test compound which is not removed by cleaning but remains on the support is measured and the amount of adsorption on the support is calculated. The amount of remaining compound may be directly measured or calculated from the measured amount of the test compound dissolved in the cleaning solution. The amount of the compound may be determined by, for example, fluorescent X-ray spectroscopy, absorbance measurement using reflectance spectroscopy or liquid chromatography. The compound which is adsorbable on the support is a compound remaining in an amount of at least 1 mg/m2 even after the above-described cleaning treatment has been carried out.
  • The group which is adsorbable on the surface of the hydrophilic support is a functional group that may form a chemical bond (e.g., an ionic bond, a hydrogen bond, a coordinate bond, or an intermolecular force bond) with a substance (e.g., a metal or a metal oxide) or a functional group (e.g., a hydroxy group) present on the surface of the hydrophilic surface. The adsorbable group is preferably an acid radical or a cationic group.
  • Particularly preferred examples of the monomer having an adsorbable group include compounds represented by the following formulas (III) and (IV):
    Figure imgb0052
    wherein R1, R2 and R3 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or an alkyl group of 1 to 6 carbon atoms. R1, R2 and R3 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group of 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and most preferably a hydrogen atom or methyl. It is particularly preferred that R2 and R3 each represent a hydrogen atom. Z is a functional group adsorbing on the surface of the hydrophilic support.
  • In the formula (III), X is an oxygen atom (-O-) or an imino group (-NH-). X is more preferably an oxygen atom.
  • In the formula (III), L is a divalent linking group. L is preferably a divalent aliphatic group (alkylene group, substituted alkylene group, alkenylene group, substituted alkenylene group, alkynylene group, or substituted alkynylene group), a divalent aromatic group (allylene group or substituted allylene group), or a divalent heterocyclic group, or a combination of any of them with an oxygen atom (-O-), a sulfur atom (-S-), an imino group (-NH-), a substituted imino group (-NR- where R represents an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group) or a carbonyl group (-CO-).
  • The aliphatic group may have a cyclic structure or a branched structure. The aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and most preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The aliphatic group is preferably a saturated aliphatic group rather than an unsaturated aliphatic group. The aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include halogen atoms, hydroxy group, aromatic groups and heterocyclic groups.
  • The aromatic group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 15 carbon atoms, and most preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include halogen atoms, hydroxy group, aliphatic groups, aromatic groups and heterocyclic groups.
  • The heterocyclic group preferably has a 5-membered or 6-membered ring as the heterocyclic ring. The heterocyclic ring may be condensed with other heterocyclic ring, an aliphatic ring or an aromatic ring. The heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include halogen groups, hydroxy group, oxo group (=O), thio group (=S), imino group (=NH), substituted imino groups (=N-R where R represents an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group), aliphatic groups, aromatic groups and heterocyclic groups.
  • L is preferably a divalent linking group which includes a plurality of polyoxyalkylene structures and more preferably polyoxyethylene structures. In other words, L preferably contains -(OCH2CH2)n- (n is an integer of 2 or more).
  • In the formula (IV), Y is a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. In cases where Y is a nitrogen atom and L is connected to Y to form a quaternary pyridinium group, the quaternary pyridinium group itself exhibits the adsorptive properties and therefore Z may not be a functional group adsorbing on the surface of the hydrophilic support but a hydrogen atom. L represents a divalent linking group as defined in the formula (III) or a single bond.
  • The adsorbable functional group has been described above.
  • Typical examples of the compounds represented by the formulas (III) and (IV) are shown below.
    Figure imgb0053
    Figure imgb0054
  • Illustrative examples of the hydrophilic group of the undercoating polymer resin that may be preferably used include hydroxy, carboxy, carboxylate, hydroxyethyl, polyoxyethyl, hydroxypropyl, polyoxypropyl, amino, aminoethyl, aminopropyl, ammonium, amide, carboxymethyl, sulfonate and phosphate groups. Of these, a sulfonate group exhibiting high hydrophilicity is preferred.
  • Illustrative examples of the sulfonate group-containing monomer include sodium salts and amine salts of methallyloxybenzenesulfonic acid, allyloxybenzenesulfonic acid, arylsulfonic acid, vinylsulfonic acid, p-styrenesulfonic acid, methallylsulfonic acid, acrylamide t-butylsulfonic acid, 2-acrylamide-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid, and (3-acryloyloxypropyl)butylsulfonic acid. Of these, a sodium salt of 2-acrylamide-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid is preferred in terms of hydrophilicity and handling in the synthesis.
  • The undercoating polymer resin preferably has a polymerizable reactive group. The polymerizable reactive group serves to improve the adhesion to image areas. It is possible to introduce a crosslinkable functional group such as an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the polymer side chain or to form a salt structure with a compound that has an ethylenically unsaturated bond with a substituent which is opposite in charge to a polar substituent of the polymer resin so that the undercoating polymer resin may have crosslinking properties.
  • Examples of the monomer for introducing an ethylenically unsaturated bond in the side chain of the molecule include monomers of esters or amides of acrylic acid or methacrylic acid, in which the ester or amide residue (R in -COOR or -CONHR) has an ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • Exemplary residues (the above-mentioned R) having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include -(CH2)nCR1=CR2R3, - (CH2O)nCH2CR1=CR2R3, -(CH2CH2O)nCH2CR1=CR2R3, -(CH2)nNH-CO-O-CH2CR1=CR2R3, -(CH2)n-O-CO-CR1=CR2R3 and -(CH2CH2O)2-X (wherein each of R1 to R3 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl, aryl, alkoxy or aryloxy group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and R1 and R2 or R3 may be bonded together to form a ring; the letter n is an integer from 1 to 10; and X is a dicyclopentadienyl residue).
  • Specific examples of suitable ester residues include - CH2CH=CH2 (mentioned in JP 7-21633 B ), -CH2CH2O-CH2CH=CH2, - CH2C(CH3)=CH2, -CH2CH=CH-C6H5, -CH2CH2OCOCH=CH-C6H5, -CH2CH2NHCOO-CH2CH=CH2 and -CH2CH2O-X (wherein X is a dicyclopentadienyl residue).
  • Specific examples of suitable amide residues include - CH2CH=CH2, -CH2CH2O-Y (wherein Y is a cyclohexene residue) and - CH2CH2OCO-CH=CH2.
  • The polymerizable reactive group content in the undercoating polymer resin (content of radical-polymerizable unsaturated double bonds, as determined by iodometry) is preferably 0.1 to 10.0 mmol, more preferably 1.0 to 7.0 mmol, and most preferably 2.0 to 5.5 mmol, per gram of the polymer resin. Within the above-defined range, a good storage stability is achieved while striking a good balance between the sensitivity and scumming resistance.
  • The undercoating polymer resin has a weight-average molecular weight of preferably at least 5,000, and more preferably from 10,000 to 300,000, and has a number-average molecular weight of preferably at least 1,000, and more preferably from 2,000 to 250,000. The polydispersity (weight-average molecular weight/number-average molecular weight) is preferably from 1.1 to 10.
  • The undercoating polymer resin may be a random polymer, a block polymer or a graft polymer, but a random polymer is preferred.
  • The undercoating polymer resins may be used singly or as a mixture of two or more thereof. The chelating agents may also be used singly or as a mixture of two or more thereof. The undercoat-forming coating solution is obtained by dissolving the undercoating polymer resin and the chelating agent in an organic solvent (e.g., methanol, ethanol, acetone, or methyl ethyl ketone) and/or water. The undercoat-forming coating solution may contain an infrared absorber.
  • Various known methods may be used to apply the undercoat-forming coating solution to the support. Examples of suitable methods of coating include bar coating, spin coating, spray coating, curtain coating, dip coating, air knife coating, blade coating and roll coating.
  • The coating weight (solids content) of the undercoat is preferably from 0.1 to 100 mg/m2 and more preferably from 1 to 50 mg/m2.
  • [Protective Layer]
  • In the presensitized plate of the invention, the image recording layer may optionally have a protective layer formed thereon to prevent scuffing and other damage to the image recording layer, to serve as an oxygen barrier, and to prevent ablation during exposure to a high-intensity laser.
  • In the practice of the invention, exposure is ordinarily carried out under conditions open to the atmosphere. A protective layer prevents oxygen and low-molecular-weight compounds such as basic substances which are present in the atmosphere and would interfere with the image-forming reactions triggered by light exposure in the image recording layer from centering the image recording layer, thus keeping the image-forming reactions triggered by exposure under open-air conditions from being hindered. Therefore, the properties desired of the protective layer preferably include a low permeability of low-molecular-weight compounds such as oxygen, good transmittance of the light used for exposure, excellent adhesion to the image recording layer, and ready removal in the on-machine development step following exposure.
  • Various protective layers endowed with such properties have been investigated and are closely described in, for example, US 3,458,311 and JP 55-49729 B .
  • Materials that may be used in the protective layer include water-soluble polymeric compounds having a relatively good crystallinity. Illustrative examples include water-soluble polymers such as polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), polyvinyl pyrrolidone, acidic celluloses, gelatin, gum arabic and polyacrylic acid. Of these, the use of polyvinyl alcohol as the primary component provides the best results with respect to basic properties such as the oxygen barrier properties and removability of the protective layer during development. So long as the polyvinyl alcohol includes unsubstituted vinyl alcohol units which provide the protective layer with the required oxygen barrier properties and water solubility, some of the vinyl alcohol units may be substituted with esters, ethers or acetals, and the layer may include also other copolymerizable components.
  • It is preferable for the polyvinyl alcohol to be 71 to 100 mol% hydrolyzed and to have a degree of polymerization in a range of 300 to 2,400. Specific examples of such polyvinyl alcohols include the following, all produced by Kuraray Co., Ltd.: PVA-105, PVA-110, PVA-117, PVA-117H, PVA-120, PVA-124, PVA-124H, PVA-CS, PVA-CST, PVA-HC, PVA-203, PVA-204, PVA-205, PVA-210, PVA-217, PVA-220, PVA-224, PVA-217EE, PVA-217E, PVA-220E, PVA-224E, PVA-405, PVA-420, PVA-613 and L-8.
  • Conditions such as the protective layer ingredients (choice of PVA, use of additives, etc.) and coating weight may be suitably selected after taking into consideration not only the oxygen barrier properties and the removability during development, but also other characteristics, including the antifogging properties, adhesion, and scratch resistance of the protective layer. In general, a higher percent hydrolysis of the PVA (i.e., a higher content of unsubstituted vinyl alcohol units in the protective layer) and a greater film thickness provide higher oxygen barrier properties, resulting in better sensitivity. Moreover, to prevent undesirable polymerization reactions from occurring during production and storage, to prevent undesirable fogging during imagewise exposure, and to prevent thick image lines and other unwanted effects, it is preferable for the oxygen barrier properties to be not too high. Specifically, an oxygen permeability A at 25°C and a pressure of not more than one atmosphere preferably satisfies 0.2 ≤ A ≤ 20 ml/m2·day.
  • In a preferred embodiment, the protective layer contains an inorganic layered compound as described in JP 11-38633 A . A combination of the inorganic layered compound and the water-soluble polymeric compound enables high oxygen barrier properties to be achieved. The inorganic layered compound that may be used in the invention is in the form of thin planar particles, and examples thereof include a mica group including a natural mica and a synthetic mica represented by the general formula:

             A(B,C)2-5D4O10(OH,F,O)2

    (wherein A is potassium, sodium or calcium, B and C are each iron (II), iron (III), manganese, aluminum, magnesium or vanadium, D is silicon or aluminum), talc represented by the formula: 3MgO·4SiO·H2O, tainiolite, montmorillonite, saponite, hectorite, and zirconium phosphate.
  • Illustrative examples of the natural mica include muscovite, paragonite, phlogopite, biotite, and lepidolite.
  • Illustrative examples of the synthetic mica include non-swelling micas such as fluorophlogopite KMg3(AlSi3O10)F2, potassium tetrasilisic mica (KMg2.5Si4O10)F2; and swelling micas such as sodium tetrasilisic mica NaMg2.5(Si4O10)F2, sodium or lithium tainiolite (Na,Li)Mg2Li(Si4O10)F2, and montmorillonite type sodium or lithium hectorite (Na,Li)1/8Mg2/5Li1/8(Si4O10)F2. Synthetic steatite is also useful.
  • Of the above-described inorganic layered compounds, a fluorine-containing swelling mica which is a synthetic inorganic layered compound is particularly useful in the invention.
  • The inorganic layered compound that may be used in the invention desirably has such a shape that the thickness is as small as possible from the viewpoint of diffusion control and that the plane size is as large as possible so long as the smoothness of the coated surface and transmission of active rays are not impaired. Therefore, the aspect ratio is at least 20, preferably at least 100 and more preferably at least 200. The aspect ratio is a ratio of the thickness to the major axis length of particles and can be measured from, for example, a projected image of a particle micrograph. A larger aspect ratio brings about a higher effect.
  • The inorganic layered compound that may be used in the invention has a particle size in terms of the average major axis length of 0.3 to 20 µm, preferably 0.5 to 10 µm, and more preferably 1 to 5 µm. The particles have an average thickness of up to 0.1 µm, preferably up to 0.05 µm, and more preferably up to 0.01 µm. For example, a swelling synthetic mica which is a typical one of the inorganic layered compounds has a thickness of about 1 to about 50 nm and a plane size of about 1 to about 20 µm.
  • Incorporation of such inorganic layered compound particles having a high aspect ratio in the protective layer improves the coating strength and prevents permeation of oxygen and moisture with high efficiency and hence deterioration of the protective layer due to deformation.
  • The content of the inorganic layered compound in the protective layer is preferably from 5 wt% to 55 wt%, and more preferably from 10 wt% to 40 wt% based on the total solids in the protective layer. A high resistance to adhesion is achieved at a content of 5 wt% or more and a good coatability and a high sensitivity are achieved at a content of 55 wt% or less. Even in the case of using a plurality of inorganic layered compounds in combination, the total content of the inorganic layered compounds used preferably falls within the above-defined wt% range.
  • The inorganic layered compound that may be used in the protective layer is dispersed, for example, by the following procedure. From 5 to 10 parts by weight of a swelling layered compound which is illustrated as a preferable inorganic layered compound is first added to 100 parts by weight of water, then fully blended with water and swelled, after which the resulting mixture is dispersed using a dispersing machine.
  • The dispersing machine used include, for example, a variety of mills in which mechanical power is directly applied to carry out dispersion, a high-speed agitation type dispersing machine having a large shear force and a dispersing machine providing high-intensity ultrasonic energy. Specific examples thereof include a ball mill, a sand grinder mill, a visco mill, a colloid mill, a homogenizer, a dissolver, a polytron, a homomixer, a homoblender, a keddy mill, a jet agitor, a capillary emulsifier, a liquid siren, an electromagnetic strain type ultrasonic generator and an emulsifier having a Polman whistle. The dispersion containing 5 to 10 wt% of the inorganic layered compound thus prepared is highly viscous or in the form of a gel and exhibits extremely good storage stability. In preparing a casting fluid for the protective layer using the dispersion, it is preferred that the dispersion be diluted with water, thoroughly stirred and then blended with a binder solution to prepare the coating fluid.
  • Flexibility may be imparted to the protective layer by adding, for example, glycerin or dipropylene glycol to the composition making up the protective layer in an amount of several wt% with respect to the water-soluble polymeric compound. In addition, anionic surfactants such as sodium alkylsulfate and sodium alkylsulfonate; amphoteric surfactants such as alkylaminocarboxylate and alkylaminodicarbonylate; and nonionic surfactants such as polyoxyethylene alkyl phenyl ether may be added in an amount of several wt% with respect to the (co)polymer. The protective film has a film thickness of preferably 0.1 to 5 µm, and more preferably 0.2 to 2 µm.
  • Properties such as adhesion of the protective layer to image areas and scratch resistance, are also very important in the handling of the presensitized plate. More specifically, when such a protective layer, which is hydrophilic because it contains a water-soluble polymeric compound, is laminated onto the oleophilic image recording layer, the protective layer has a tendency to delaminate owing to out-of-contact defects. In areas of delamination, defects such as poor curing of the film may arise due to the inhibition of polymerization caused by oxygen.
  • Various proposals have been made for improving adhesion between the image recording layer and the protective layer. For example, JP 49-70702 A mentions that sufficient adhesion can be achieved by mixing 20 to 60 wt% of an acrylic emulsion or a water-insoluble vinyl pyrrolidone-vinyl acetate copolymer into a hydrophilic polymer composed primarily of polyvinyl alcohol, and laminating the resulting mixture onto the image recording layer.
  • The thus prepared protective layer-forming coating fluid is applied onto the image recording layer provided on the support and dried to form the protective layer. The coating solvent may be selected as appropriate in connection with the binder, but distilled water and purified water are preferably used in cases where a water-soluble polymer is employed. No particular limitation is imposed on the method of forming the protective layer but any known methods such as those described in US 3,458,311 and JP 55-49729 B may be applied. Examples of suitable methods of coating include blade coating, air knife coating, gravure coating, roll coating, spray coating, dip coating and bar coating.
  • The protective layer preferably has a coating weight after drying of 0.01 to 10 g/m2, more preferably 0.02 to 3 g/m2 and even more preferably 0.02 to 1 g/m2.
  • Other functions may also be imparted to the protective layer. For example, by adding a colorant (e.g., a water-soluble dye) which has an excellent transmittance of the infrared light used for exposure and can efficiently absorb light of other wavelengths, the amenability of the presensitized plate to handling under a safelight can be improved without lowering the sensitivity.
  • The presensitized plate of the invention provided with such an image recording layer uses the aluminum alloy plate and the lithographic printing plate support of the invention and is therefore rendered into a lithographic printing plate having an excellent resistance to spotting by carrying out a development process.
  • EXAMPLES
  • The invention is described below in detail by way of examples. However, the invention should not be construed as being limited to the following examples.
  • 1. Manufacture of Aluminum Alloy Plate for Lithographic Printing Plate Example 1
    1. (1) First, an aluminum material with an aluminum purity of at least 99.85% (grade: P0608 containing such impurities as 0.07 wt% of iron, 0.03 wt% of silicon, 0.003 wt% of titanium and approximately 0 wt% of copper) was added to a melting furnace where a melt containing 0.3 wt% of iron remained, and melted to prepare an aluminum alloy melt.
      The content of the remaining melt in the aluminum alloy melt was about 12 wt% and the aluminum material was dissolved in an amount of 88 wt%.
    2. (2) Then, the aluminum alloy melt was transferred to a holding furnace, where the components of the melt were checked. Subsequently, silicon and copper were added in the form of a mother alloy of aluminum and silicon and a mother alloy of aluminum and copper, respectively, to adjust the components of the melt so that silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.005 wt%, respectively.
      As a result of mixing of the aluminum material with the melt remaining in the furnace, the iron content increased to 0.10 wt%.
    3. (3) Thereafter, a TiB2-containing aluminum alloy in wire form serving as a crystal refining material was added from a melt channel provided at the exit of the holding furnace. The melt containing the crystal refining material was then subjected to a degassing step and a filtering step, and 4 ingots with a thickness of 500 mm, a width of 1200 mm and a weight of 6 tons were prepared by semicontinuous casting.
    4. (4) Then, 10-mn portions were removed from both surfaces of each ingot by scalping, which was followed by soaking in a soaking furnace at 500°C for 10 hours. Subsequently, the ingot was rolled to a thickness of 3 mm by hot rolling (temperature at the end of hot rolling: about 310°C) and finished to a thickness of 0.3 mm by cold rolling without any further heating treatment.
      Cold rolling was carried out at a total draft of 90%.
    5. (5) Thereafter, ear portions were slit. In the subsequent correction step, cold rolling oil remaining on the surface was removed by cleaning, which was followed by flatness correction and application of a minute amount of lubricant for surface protection. An aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate support with a thickness of 0.3 mm, a width of 1030 mm and a weight of about 5 tons was thus prepared.
  • This aluminum alloy plate was used to check the contents of trace amount components and as a result it was revealed that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.12 wt%, 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.01 wt%, respectively.
  • Example 2
    1. (1) First, an aluminum material with an aluminum purity of at least 99.99% (containing such impurities as 0.003 wt% of iron, 0.001 wt% of silicon, 0.000 wt% of titanium and 0.001 wt% of copper) was added to the melting furnace where a melt containing 0.3 wt% of iron remained, and melted to prepare an aluminum alloy melt.
      The content of the remaining melt in the aluminum alloy melt was about 10 wt% and the aluminum material was dissolved in an amount of 90 wt%.
    2. (2) Then, the aluminum alloy melt was transferred to the holding furnace, where the components of the melt were checked. Subsequently, silicon and copper were added in the form of a mother alloy of aluminum and silicon and a mother alloy of aluminum and copper, respectively, to adjust the components of the melt so that silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.005 wt%, respectively.
      As a result of mixing of the aluminum material with the melt remaining in the furnace, the iron content increased to 0.04 wt%.
    3. (3) Thereafter, a TiB2-containing aluminum alloy in wire form serving as a crystal refining material was added from the melt channel provided at the exit of the holding furnace. The melt containing the crystal refining material was then subjected to the degassing step and the filtering step, and 4 ingots with a thickness of 500 mm, a width of 1200 mm and a weight of 6 tons were prepared by semicontinuous casting.
    4. (4) Then, 10-mm portions were removed from both surfaces of each ingot by scalping, which was followed by soaking in the soaking furnace at 500°C for 10 hours. Subsequently, the ingot was rolled to a thickness of 3.1 mm by hot rolling (temperature at the end of hot rolling: about 310°C) and finished to a thickness of 0.3 mm by cold rolling without any further heating treatment.
      Cold rolling was carried out at a total draft of 90%.
    5. (5) Thereafter, ear portions were slit. In the subsequent correction step, removal of cold rolling oil remaining on the surface was followed by flatness correction and application of a minute amount of lubricant for surface protection. An aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate support with a thickness of 0.3 mm, a width of 1030 mm and a weight of about 5 tons was thus prepared.
  • This aluminum alloy plate was used to check the contents of trace amount components and as a result it was revealed that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.05 wt%, 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.01 wt%, respectively.
  • Example 3
    1. (1) First, an aluminum material with a low iron content was selected from those having an aluminum purity of at least 99.7% (grade: P1020). The thus selected aluminum material contained the following impurities: 0.08 wt% of iron, 0,05 wt% of silicon, 0.005 wt% of titanium, 0.01 wt% of gallium, 0.005 wt% of vanadium and 0.003 wt% of cupper.
      Then, the selected aluminum material was added to the melting furnace where a melt containing 0.3 wt% of iron remained, and melted to prepare an aluminum alloy melt.
      The content of the remaining melt in the aluminum alloy melt was about 11 wt% and the aluminum material was dissolved in an amount of 89 wt%.
    2. (2) Then, the aluminum alloy melt was transferred to the holding furnace, where the components of the melt were checked. Subsequently, silicon and copper were added in the form of a mother alloy of aluminum and silicon and a mother alloy of aluminum and copper, respectively, to adjust the components of the melt so that silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.008 wt%, respectively.
      As a result of mixing of the aluminum material with the melt remaining in the furnace, the iron content increased to 0.11 wt%.
    3. (3) Thereafter, a TiB2-containing aluminum alloy in wire form serving as a crystal refining material was added from the melt channel provided at the exit of the holding furnace. The melt containing the crystal refining material was then subjected to the degassing step and the filtering step, and 4 ingots with a thickness of 500 mm, a width of 1200 mm and a weight of 6 tons were prepared by direct chill casting.
    4. (4) Then, 10-mm portions were removed from both surfaces of each ingot by scalping, which was followed by soaking in the soaking furnace at 500°C for 10 hours. Subsequently, the ingot was rolled to a thickness of 3 mm by hot rolling (temperature at the end of hot rolling: about 310°C) and finished to a thickness of 0.3 mm by cold rolling without any further heating treatment.
      Cold rolling was carried out at a total draft of 90%.
    5. (5) Thereafter, ear portions were slit. In the subsequent correction step, cold rolling oil remaining on the surface was removed by cleaning, which was followed by flatness correction and application of a minute amount of lubricant for surface protection. An aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate support with a thickness of 0.3 mm, a width of 1030 mm and a weight of about 5 tons was thus prepared.
  • This aluminum alloy plate was used to check the contents of trace amount components and as a result it was revealed that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.14 wt%, 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.013 wt%, respectively.
  • Example 4
    1. (1) Example 3 was repeated except that the melt remaining in the casting equipment including the melting furnace and holding furnace (aluminum melt remaining after the manufacture of an aluminum alloy plate) was completely removed prior to melting another aluminum material, thereby preparing an aluminum alloy melt.
      The aluminum alloy melt contains 100 wt% of the aluminum material dissolved therein.
    2. (2) Then, the aluminum alloy melt was transferred to the holding furnace, where the components of the melt were checked, Subsequently, silicon and copper were added in the form of a mother alloy of aluminum and silicon and a mother alloy of aluminum and copper, respectively, to adjust the components of the melt so that silicon and copper were contained in amounts of 0.09 wt% and 0.02 wt%, respectively.
  • The iron content was 0.09 wt%.
  • The step in (3) and the subsequent steps were performed in the same manner as in Example 3 to prepare an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate support with a thickness of 0.3 mm, a width of 1030 mm and a weight of about 5 tons. This aluminum alloy plate was used to check the contents of trace amount components and as a result it was revealed that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.11 wt%, 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.01 wt%, respectively.
  • Example 5
    1. (1) First, an aluminum material with an aluminum purity of at least 99.85% (grade: P0608 containing such impurities as 0.07 wt% of iron, 0.03 wt% of silicon, 0.003 wt% of titanium and approximately 0 wt% of copper) was added to the melting furnace where a melt containing 0.3 wt% of iron remained, and melted to prepare an aluminum alloy melt.
      The content of the remaining melt in the aluminum alloy melt was about 12 wt% and the aluminum material was dissolved in an amount of 88 wt%.
    2. (2) Then, the aluminum alloy melt was transferred to the holding furnace, where the components of the melt were checked. Subsequently, silicon and copper were added in the form of a mother alloy of aluminum and silicon and a mother alloy of aluminum and copper, respectively, to adjust the components of the melt so that silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.005 wt%, respectively.
      As a result of mixing of the aluminum material with the melt remaining in the furnace, the iron content increased to 0.10 wt%.
    3. (3) Thereafter, a TiB2-containing aluminum alloy in wire form serving as a crystal refining material was added from the melt channel provided at the exit of the holding furnace. The melt containing the crystal refining material was then subjected to the degassing step and the filtering step, and 4 ingots with a thickness of 500 mm, a width of 1200 mm and a weight of 6 tons were prepared by semicontinuous casting.
    4. (4) Then, 10-mm portions were removed from both surfaces of each ingot by scalping, which was followed by soaking in the soaking furnace at 500°C for 10 hours. Subsequently, the ingot was rolled to a thickness of 2.6 mm by hot rolling (temperature at the end of hot rolling: about 310°C) and finished to a thickness of 0.3 mm by cold rolling without any further heating treatment.
      Cold rolling was carried out at a total draft of 88.5%.
    5. (5) Thereafter, ear portions were slit. In the subsequent correction step, cold rolling oil remaining on the surface was removed by cleaning, which was followed by flatness correction and application of a minute amount of lubricant for surface protection. An aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate support with a thickness of 0.3 mm, a width of 1030 mm and a weight of about 5 tons was thus prepared.
      This aluminum alloy plate was used to check the contents of trace amount components and as a result it was revealed that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.12 wt%, 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.01 wt%, respectively.
    Example 6
    1. (1) First, an aluminum material with an aluminum purity of at least 99.85% (grade: P0608 containing such impurities as 0.07 wt% of iron, 0.03 wt% of silicon, 0.003 wt% of titanium and approximately 0 wt% of copper) was added to the melting furnace where a melt containing 0.3 wt% of iron remained, and melted to prepare an aluminum alloy melt.
      The content of the remaining melt in the aluminum alloy melt was about 12 wt% and the aluminum material was dissolved in an amount of 88 wt%.
    2. (2) Then, the aluminum alloy melt was transferred to the holding furnace, where the components of the melt were checked. Subsequently, silicon and copper were added in the form of a mother alloy of aluminum and silicon and a mother alloy of aluminum and copper, respectively, to adjust the components of the melt so that silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.005 wt%, respectively.
      As a result of mixing of the aluminum material with the melt remaining in the furnace, the iron content increased to 0.10 wt%.
    3. (3) Thereafter, a TiB2-containing aluminum alloy in wire form serving as a crystal refining material was added from the melt channel provided at the exit of the holding furnace. The melt containing the crystal refining material was then subjected to the degassing step and the filtering step, and 4 ingots with a thickness of 500 mm, a width of 1200 mm and a weight of 6 tons were prepared by semicontinuous casting.
    4. (4) Then, 10-mm portions were removed from both surfaces of each ingot by scalping, which was followed by soaking in the soaking furnace at 500°C for 10 hours. Subsequently, the ingot was rolled to a thickness of 3.8 mm by hot rolling (temperature at the end of hot rolling: about 310°C) and finished to a thickness of 0.3 mm by cold rolling without any further heating treatment.
      Cold rolling was carried out at a total draft of 92%.
    5. (5) Thereafter, ear portions were slit. In the subsequent correction step, cold rolling oil remaining on the surface was removed by cleaning, which was followed by flatness correction and application of a minute amount of lubricant for surface protection. An aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate support with a thickness of 0.3 mm, a width of 1030 mm and a weight of about 5 tons was thus prepared.
  • This aluminum alloy plate was used to check the contents of trace amount components and as a result it was revealed that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.12 wt%, 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.01 wt%, respectively.
  • Example 7
    1. (1) First, an aluminum material with an aluminum purity of at least 99.85% (grade: P0608 containing such impurities as 0.07 wt% of iron, 0.03 wt% of silicon, 0.003 wt% of titanium and approximately 0 wt% of copper) was added to the melting furnace where a melt containing 0.3 wt% of iron remained, and melted to prepare an aluminum alloy melt.
      The content of the remaining melt in the aluminum alloy melt was about 12 wt% and the aluminum material was dissolved in an amount of 88 wt%.
    2. (2) Then, the aluminum alloy melt was transferred to the holding furnace, where the components of the melt were checked. Subsequently, silicon and copper were added in the form of a mother alloy of aluminum and silicon and a mother alloy of aluminum and copper, respectively, to adjust the components of the melt so that silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.005 wt%, respectively.
      As a result of mixing of the aluminum material with the melt remaining in the furnace, the iron content increased to 0.10 wt%.
    3. (3) Thereafter, a TiB2-containing aluminum alloy in wire form serving as a crystal refining material was added from the melt channel provided at the exit of the holding furnace. The melt containing the crystal refining material was then subjected to the degassing step and the filtering step, and 4 ingots with a thickness of 500 mm, a width of 1200 mm and a weight of 6 tons were prepared by semicontinuous casting.
    4. (4) Then, 10-mm portions were removed from both surfaces of each ingot by scalping, which was followed by soaking in the soaking furnace at 500°C for 10 hours. Subsequently, the ingot was rolled to a thickness of 3.8 mm by hot rolling (temperature at the end of hot rolling: about 260°C), and was further subjected to intermediate annealing at 500°C for 60 seconds, then finished to a thickness of 0.3 mm by cold rolling.
      Cold rolling was carried out at a total draft of 92%.
    5. (5) Thereafter, ear portions were slit. In the subsequent correction step, cold rolling oil remaining on the surface was removed by cleaning, which was followed by flatness correction and application of a minute amount of lubricant for surface protection. An aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate support with a thickness of 0.3 mm, a width of 1030 mm and a weight of about 5 tons was thus prepared.
  • This aluminum alloy plate was used to check the contents of trace amount components and as a result it was revealed that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.12 wt%, 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.01 wt%, respectively.
  • Comparative Example 1
    1. (1) An aluminum material with a low iron content was not selected but one with an aluminum purity of at least 99.7% (grade: P1020 containing such impurities as 0.18 wt% of iron, 0.06 wt% of silicon, 0.005 wt% of titanium, 0.012 wt% of gallium, 0.006 wt% of vanadium, and 0.003 wt% of copper) was used to prepare a conventional aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate.
      Specifically, the aluminum material was added to the melting furnace where a melt containing 0.3 wt% of iron remained, and melted to prepare an aluminum alloy melt.
      The content of the remaining melt in the aluminum alloy melt was about 11 wt% and the aluminum material was dissolved in an amount of 89 wt%.
    2. (2) Then, the aluminum alloy melt was transferred to the holding furnace, where the components of the melt were checked. Subsequently, iron, silicon and copper were added in the form of a mother alloy of aluminum and iron, a mother alloy of aluminum and silicon and a mother alloy of aluminum and copper, respectively, to adjust the components of the melt so that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.30 wt%, 0.08 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.005 wt%, respectively.
    3. (3) Thereafter, a TiB2-containing aluminum alloy in wire form serving as a crystal refining material was added from the melt channel provided at the exit of the holding furnace. The melt containing the crystal refining material was then subjected to the degassing step and the filtering step, and 4 ingots with a thickness of 500 mm, a width of 1200 mm, and a weight of 6 tons were prepared by semicontinuous casting.
    4. (4) Then, 10-mm portions were removed from both surfaces of each ingot by scalping, which was followed by soaking in the soaking furnace at 500°C for 10 hours. Subsequently, the ingot was rolled to a thickness of 3 mm by hot rolling (temperature at the end of hot rolling: about 310°C) and finished to a thickness of 0.3 mm by cold rolling without any further heating treatment.
      Cold rolling was carried out at a total draft of 90%.
    5. (5) Thereafter, ear portions were slit. In the subsequent correction step, cold rolling oil remaining on the surface was removed by cleaning, which was followed by flatness correction and application of a minute amount of lubricant for surface protection. An aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate support with a thickness of 0.3 mm, a width of 1030 mm and a weight of about 5 tons was thus prepared.
  • This aluminum alloy plate was used to check the contents of trace amount components and as a result it was revealed that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.32 wt%, 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.01 wt%, respectively.
  • Comparative Example 2
    1. (1) An aluminum material with an aluminum purity of at least 99.7% (grade: P1020 containing such impurities as 0.18 wt% of iron, 0.06 wt% of silicon, 0.005 wt% of titanium, 0.012 wt% of gallium, 0.006 wt% of vanadium, and 0.003 wt% of copper) was used as in Comparative Example 1.
      Specifically, Comparative Example 1 was repeated except that the melt remaining in the casting equipment including the melting furnace and holding furnace (aluminum melt remaining after the manufacture of an aluminum alloy plate) was completely removed prior to melting another aluminum material, thereby preparing an aluminum alloy melt.
      The aluminum alloy melt contains 100 wt% of the aluminum material dissolved therein.
    2. (2) Then, the aluminum alloy melt was transferred to the holding furnace, where the components of the melt were checked. Subsequently, silicon and copper were added in the form of a mother alloy of aluminum and silicon and a mother alloy of aluminum and copper, respectively, to adjust the components of the melt so that silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.08 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.005 wt%, respectively.
      The iron content was 0.19 wt%.
      The step in (3) and the subsequent steps were performed in the same manner as in Example 3 to prepare an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate support with a thickness of 0.3 mm, a width of 1030 mm and a weight of about 5 tons. This aluminum alloy plate was used to check the contents of trace amount components and as a result it was revealed that iron, silicon, copper and titanium were contained in amounts of 0.20 wt%, 0.09 wt%, 0.02 wt% and 0.01 wt%, respectively, and that the plate contained iron in a slightly smaller amount than common aluminum alloy plates for use in lithographic printing plate supports.
    Comparative Example 3
  • Example 1 was repeated except that the plate was rolled to a thickness of 2.3 mm by hot rolling (temperature at the end of hot rolling: about 310°C), thereby preparing an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate support.
  • Cold rolling was carried out at a total draft of 87%.
  • Comparative Example 4
  • An aluminum melt prepared so as to contain 0.09 wt% of iron, 0.09 wt% of silicon and 0.010 wt% of copper was used to prepare a cast plate with a plate thickness of 6 mm by continuous casting and rolling.
  • Then, the plate was rolled to a thickness of 2.5 mm by cold rolling and rolled to a thickness of 0.3 mm by intermediate annealing under the conditions of maintaining the plate at 450°C for 0.4 second, heating it at an average temperature rise rate of 700°C/s and cooling it at an average temperature falling rate of 750°C/s so that the draft at the time of the final cold rolling was 88%.
  • Then, ear portions were slit. In the subsequent correction step, cold rolling oil remaining on the surface was removed by cleaning, which was followed by flatness correction and application of a minute amount of lubricant for surface protection. An aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate support with a thickness of 0.3 mm, a width of 1030 mm and a weight of about 5 tons was thus prepared.
  • Comparative Example 5
  • An aluminum melt prepared so as to contain 0.04 wt% of iron, 0.10 wt% of silicon and 0.009 wt% of copper was used to prepare a cast plate with a plate thickness of 6 mm by continuous casting and rolling.
  • Then, the plate was rolled to a thickness of 2.5 mm by cold rolling and rolled to a thickness of 0.3 mm by intermediate annealing under the conditions of maintaining the plate at 450°C for 0.4 second, heating it at an average temperature rise rate of 1000°C/s and cooking it at an average temperature falling rate of 1000°C/s so that the draft at the time of the final cold rolling was 88%.
  • Then, ear portions were slit. In the subsequent correction step, cold rolling oil remaining on the surface was removed by cleaning, which was followed by flatness correction and application of a minute amount of lubricant for surface protection. An aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate support with a thickness of 0.3 mm, a width of 1030 mm and a weight of about 5 tons was thus prepared.
  • 2. Manufacture of Lithographic Printing Plate Support
  • The respective aluminum alloy plates manufactured as described above were subjected to the treatments (a) to (k) to thereby manufacture lithographic printing plate supports. Rinsing treatment was carried out among all the treatment steps and the water following rinsing treatment was removed with nip rollers.
  • (a) Mechanical graining treatment (brush graining)
  • Mechanical graining treatment was carried out with rotating bristle bundle brushes of an apparatus as shown in FIG. 3 while feeding an abrasive slurry in the form of a suspension of pumice having a specific gravity of 1.1 g/cm3 to the surface of the aluminum alloy plate. FIG. 3 shows an aluminum alloy plate 1, roller-type brushes (bristle bundle brushes in Examples) 2 and 4, an abrasive-containing slurry 3, and support rollers 5, 6, 7 and 8.
  • Mechanical graining treatment was carried out using an abrasive having a median diameter of 30 µm while rotating four brushes at 250 rpm. The bristle bundle brushes were made of nylon 6/10 and had a bristle diameter of 0.3 mm and a bristle length of 50 mm. Each brush was constructed of a 300 mm diameter stainless steel cylinder in which holes had been formed and bristles densely set. Two support rollers (200 mm diameter) were provided below each bristle bundle brush and spaced 300 mm apart. The bundle bristle brushes were pressed against the aluminum alloy plate until the load on the driving motor that rotates the brushes was 10 kW greater than before the bundle bristle brushes were pressed against the plate. The direction in which the brushes were rotated was the same as the direction in which the aluminum plate was moved.
  • (b) Alkali etching treatment
  • Etching treatment was carried out by using a spray line to spray the aluminum alloy plate obtained as described above with an aqueous solution having a sodium hydroxide concentration of 26 wt%, an aluminum ion concentration of 6.5 wt%, and a temperature of 70°C. The plate was then rinsed by spraying with water. The amount of dissolved aluminum was 10 g/m2.
  • (c) Desmutting treatment in aqueous acid solution
  • Next, desmutting treatment was carried out in an aqueous nitric acid solution. The nitric acid wastewater from the subsequent electrochemical graining treatment step was used for the aqueous nitric acid solution in desmutting treatment. The solution temperature was 35°C. Desmutting treatment was carried out by spraying the plate with the desmutting solution for 3 seconds.
  • (d) Electrochemical graining treatment
  • Electrochemical graining treatment was consecutively carried out by nitric acid electrolysis using a 60 Hz AC voltage. Aluminum nitrate was added to an aqueous solution containing 10.4 g/L of nitric acid at a temperature of 35°C to prepare an electrolytic solution having an adjusted aluminum ion concentration of 4.5 g/L, and the electrolytic solution was used in electrochemical graining treatment. Electrochemical graining treatment was carried out for a period of time TP until the current reached a peak from zero of 0.8 ms, at a duty ratio of 1:1, using an alternating current having a trapezoidal waveform shown in FIG. 1, with a carbon electrode as the counter electrode. A ferrite was used for the auxiliary anodes. An electrolytic cell of the type shown in FIG. 2 was used. The current density at the current peak was 30 A/dm2. Of the current that flows from the power supply, 5% was diverted to the auxiliary anodes. The amount of electricity (C/dm2), which is the total amount of electricity when the aluminum alloy plate serves as an anode, was 185 C/dm2. The plate was then rinsed by spraying with water.
  • (e) Alkali etching treatment
  • Etching treatment was carried out by using a spray line to spray the aluminum alloy plate obtained as described above with an aqueous solution having a sodium hydroxide concentration of 5 wt%, an aluminum ion concentration of 0.5 wt%, and a temperature of 50°C. The plate was then rinsed by spraying with water. The amount of dissolved aluminum was 0.5 g/m2.
  • (f) Desmutting treatment in aqueous acid solution
  • Next, desmutting treatment was carried out in an aqueous sulfuric acid solution. The aqueous sulfuric acid solution used in Desmutting treatment was a solution having a sulfuric acid concentration of 300 g/L and an aluminum ion concentration of 5 g/L. The solution temperature was 60°C. Desmutting treatment was carried out by spraying the plate with the desmutting solution for 3 seconds.
  • (g) Electrochemical graining treatment
  • Electrochemical graining treatment was consecutively carried out by hydrochloric acid electrolysis using a 60 Hz AC voltage. Aluminum chloride was added to an aqueous solution containing 6.2 g/L of hydrochloric acid at a temperature of 33°C to prepare an electrolytic solution having an adjusted aluminum ion concentration of 4.5 g/L, and the electrolytic solution was used in electrochemical graining treatment. Electrochemical graining treatment was carried out for a period of time TP until the current reached a peak from zero of 0.8 ms, at a duty ratio of 1:1, using an alternating current having a trapezoidal waveform shown in FIG. 1, with a carbon electrode as the counter electrode. A ferrite was used for the auxiliary anodes. An electrolytic cell of the type shown in FIG. 2 was used.
  • The current density at the current peak was 25 A/dm2. The amount of electricity (C/dm2) in hydrochloric acid electrolysis, which is the total amount of electricity when the aluminum alloy plate serves as an anode, was 63 C/dm2. The plate was then rinsed by spraying with water.
  • (h) Alkali etching treatment
  • Etching treatment was carried out by using a spray line to spray the aluminum alloy plate obtained as described above with an aqueous solution having a sodium hydroxide concentration of 5 wt%, an aluminum ion concentration of 0.5 wt%, and a temperature of 50°C. The plate was then rinsed by spraying with water. The amount of dissolved aluminum was 0.1 g/m2,
  • (i) Desmutting treatment in aqueous acid solution
  • Next, wastewater generated in the anodizing treatment step (aqueous solution containing 170 g/L of sulfuric acid and 5 g/L of aluminum ions dissolved therein) was used to carry out Desmutting treatment at a solution temperature of 35°C for 4 seconds.
  • (j) Anodizing treatment
  • Anodizing treatment was carried out by DC electrolysis using an anodizing apparatus of the structure as shown in FIG, 4 to obtain a lithographic printing plate support. Sulfuric acid was used for the electrolytic solution for supplying to a first and a second electrolysis portion. Each electrolytic solution contained 170 g/L of sulfuric acid and 5 g/L of aluminum ions. Anodizing treatment was carried out by DC electrolysis at an average current density of 20 A/dm2 so that an anodized film having a coating weight of 2.7 g/m2 could be formed. The solution temperature was 40°C, the voltage was 5 to 30 V and the time was 10 seconds.
  • (k) Silicate treatment
  • In order to ensure the hydrophilicity in non-image areas, silicate treatment was carried out by dipping the plate into an aqueous solution containing 2.5 wt% of No. 3 sodium silicate at 70°C for 7 seconds. The amount of deposited silicon was 10 mg/m2. The plate was then rinsed by spraying with water.
  • 3. Manufacture of Presensitized Plate
  • An undercoat-forming coating solution of the composition indicated below was applied onto each lithographic printing plate support manufactured as described above to a coating weight after drying of 28 mg/m2 to thereby form an undercoat.
  • <Undercoat-Forming Coating Solution>
  • * Undercoating compound (1) of the structure shown below 0.18 g
    Figure imgb0055
    * Hydroxyethylimino diacetic acid 0.10 g
    * Methanol 55.24 g
    * Water 6.15 g
  • Then, an image recording layer-forming coating fluid was applied onto the thus formed undercoat by bar coating and dried in an oven at 100°C for 60 seconds to form an image recording layer having a coating weight after drying of 1.3 g/m2.
  • The image recording layer-forming coating fluid was obtained by mixing with stirring then photosensitive solution and microgel fluid shown below just before use in application.
  • <Photosensitive Solution>
  • * Binder polymer (1) 0.24 g
    * Infrared absorber (1) 0.030 g
    * Radical polymerization initiator (1) 0.162 g
    * Polymerizable compound, tris(acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate (NK ester A-9300 available from Shin-nakamura Chemical Corporation) 0.192 g
    * Low-molecular-weight hydrophilic compound, tris(2-hydroxyethyl)isocyanurate 0.062 g
    * Low-molecular-weight hydrophilic compound (1)
    [structure shown below] 0.052 g
    * Sensitizer
    Phosphonium compound (1)
    [structure shown below] 0.055 g
    * Sensitizer
    Benzyl-dimethyl-octyl ammonium·PF6 salt 0.018 g
    * Betaine derivative 0.010 g
    * Fluorochemical surfactant (1)
    [structure shown below] 0.008 g
    * Methyl ethyl ketone 1.091 g
    * 1-Methoxy-2-propanol 8.609 g
    <Microgel Fluid
    * Micogel (1) 2.640 g
    * Distilled water 2.425 g
  • The binder polymer (1), the infrared absorber (1), the radical polymerization initiator (1), the phosphonium compound (1), the low-molecular-weight hydrophilic compound (1) and the fluorochemical surfactant (1) have the structures represented by the following formulas:
    Figure imgb0056
    Figure imgb0057
    Figure imgb0058
    Figure imgb0059
    Figure imgb0060
    Figure imgb0061
    Figure imgb0062
  • The microgel (1) was synthesized by the following procedure.
  • <Synthesis of Microgel (1)>
  • For the oil phase component, 10g of an adduct of trimethylolpropane with xylene diisocyanate (Takenate D-110N available from Mitsui Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd.), 3.15 g of pentaerythritol triacrylate (SR444 available from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and 0.1 g of Pionin A-41C (available from Takemoto Oil & Fat Co., Ltd.) were dissolved in 17 g of ethyl acetate. For the aqueous phase component, 40 g of a 4 wt% aqueous solution of PVA-205 was prepared. The oil phase component and the aqueous phase component were mixed and emulsified in a homogenizer at 12,000 rpm for 10 minutes. The resulting emulsion was added to 25 g of distilled water and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes, then at 50°C for 3 hours. The thus obtained microgel fluid was diluted with distilled water so as to have a solids concentration of 15 wt% and used as the microgel (1). The average particle size of the microgel as measured by a light scattering method was 0.2 µm.
  • Then, a protective layer-forming coating fluid of the composition indicated below was applied onto the thus formed image recording layer by bar coating and dried in an oven at 120°C for 60 seconds to form a protective layer having a coating weight after drying of 0.15 g/m2, thereby obtaining a presensitized plate.
  • <Protective Layer-Forming Coating Fluid>
  • * Dispersion of an inorganic layered compound (1) 1.5 g
    * 6 wt% Aqueous solution of polyvinyl alcohol
    (CKS50; modified with sulfonic acid; degree
    of saponification: at least 99 mol%; degree
    of polymerization: 300; available from
    Nippon Synthetic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) 0.55 g
    * 6 wt% Aqueous solution of polyvinyl alcohol
    (PVA-405; degree of saponification: 81.5 mol%;
    degree of polymerization: 500; available from
    Kuraray Co., Ltd.) 0.03 g
    * 1 wt% Aqeuous solution of surfactant
    (EMALEX 710 available from Nihon
    Emulsion Co., Ltd.) 8.60 g
    * Ion exchanged water 6.0 g
  • The dispersion of the inorganic layered compound (1) was prepared by the following procedure.
  • (Preparation of Dispersion of Inorganic Layered Compound (1))
  • To 193.6 g of ion exchanged water was added 6.4 g of synthetic mica Somasif ME-100 (available from Co-Op Chemical Co., Ltd.) and the mixture was dispersed in a homogenizer to an average particle size as measured by a laser scattering method of 3 µm. The resulting dispersed particles had an aspect ratio of at least 100.
  • 4. Evaluation of Resistance to Spotting
  • The resulting presensitized plate was conditioned with a slip sheet at 25°C and 70% RH for 1 hour, wrapped with aluminum kraft paper and heated in an oven set at 60°C for 5 days.
  • Then, the temperature was lowered to room temperature and the plate was mounted onto a plate cylinder of a printing press (LITHRONE 26 manufactured by Komori Corporation) without development process.
  • Use was made of fountain solution of Ecolity-2 (available from FUJIFILM Corporation) / tap water (volume ratio: 2/98) and black ink Values-G(N) (available from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc.). The fountain solution and ink were supplied according to the standard automatic print starting method of LITHRONE 26 and on-machine development was carried out, after which printing was made on 500 sheets of Tokubishi Art Paper (76.5kg).
  • The 500th print was visually checked and the number of print stains having a size of at least 20 µm per 100 cm2 was counted. The results are shown in Table 2.
  • At a number of stains of up to 200 per 100 cm2, the presensitized plate can be evaluated as having a good resistance to severe scumming.
  • 5. Evaluation of Tensile Strength
  • A specimen with a width of 25 mm and a length of 150 mm was prepared from the resulting presensitized plate and measured for the tensile strength in the rolling direction using AUTOGRAPH (trade name) manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation.
  • Measurement was made three times under such a condition that the tensile rate was 2 nm/min and the average of the three measurements was calculated.
  • As a result, a specimen with a tensile strength of at least 150 N/mm2 can be rated as excellent in tensile strength. Table 1
    Number of printing stains with a size of at least 20 µm per 100 cm2 Tensile strength (N/mm2)
    Example 1 150 155
    Example 2 50 150
    Example 3 170 158
    Example 4 150 156
    Example 5 150 150
    Example 6 150 165
    Example 7 150 150
    Comparative Example 1 650 165
    Comparative Example 2 300 160
    Comparative Example 3 150 143
    Comparative Example 4 180 145
    Comparative Example 5 100 148
  • Table 1 reveals that a lithographic printing plate having an excellent resistance to spotting can be obtained by using an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate which is obtained by carrying out semicontinuous casting for forming an ingot in which iron is incorporated in an amount of not more than a specified value and cold rolling at a total draft exceeding a specified value.

Claims (8)

  1. A method of manufacturing an aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate comprising:
    a semicontinuous casting step for forming an ingot containing up to 0.15 wt% of iron from an aluminum alloy melt;
    a scalping step for scalping the ingot formed in the semicontinuous casting step to render the ingot into a plate form;
    a hot rolling step for rolling the ingot in the plate form following the scalping step to obtain a rolled plate; and
    a cold rolling step in which the rolled plate following the hot rolling step is subjected to cold rolling under the condition of a total draft exceeding 88% to obtain an aluminum alloy plate with a thickness of at least 0.1 mm.
  2. The method of manufacturing the aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate according to claim 1, wherein the aluminum alloy melt is a melt obtained by adding at least 50 wt% of an aluminum material containing up to 0.08 wt% of iron to a melt containing less than 0.5 wt% of iron and melting the aluminum material.
  3. An aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate obtained by the method according to claim 1 or 2.
  4. A lithographic printing plate support obtained by subjecting a surface of the aluminum alloy plate for a lithographic printing plate according to claim 3 to a surface roughening treatment including an electrochemical graining treatment and an anodizing treatment in this order.
  5. The lithographic printing plate support according to claim 4, wherein the lithographic printing plate support is obtained by further subjecting the aluminum alloy plate following the anodizing treatment to a hydrophilizing treatment which is a treatment using an alkali metal silicate so that silicon is adsorbed in an amount of 1.0 to 30 mg/m2.
  6. A presensitized plate having an image recording layer formed on the lithographic printing plate support according to claim 4 or 5.
  7. The presensitized plate according to claim 6, wherein the image recording layer contains anions comprising halide ions and/or PF6 -.
  8. The presensitized plate according to claim 6 or 7, wherein the image recording layer is one in which an image is formed by light exposure and unexposed portions are removable with printing ink and/or fountain solution.
EP09165524A 2008-07-16 2009-07-15 Method of manufacturing aluminum alloy plate for lithographic printing plate, aluminum alloy plate for lithographic printing plate, lithographic printing plate support and presensitized plate Withdrawn EP2145772A3 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2008185198A JP5296434B2 (en) 2008-07-16 2008-07-16 Master for lithographic printing plate

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
EP2145772A2 true EP2145772A2 (en) 2010-01-20
EP2145772A3 EP2145772A3 (en) 2012-02-29

Family

ID=41181106

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP09165524A Withdrawn EP2145772A3 (en) 2008-07-16 2009-07-15 Method of manufacturing aluminum alloy plate for lithographic printing plate, aluminum alloy plate for lithographic printing plate, lithographic printing plate support and presensitized plate

Country Status (2)

Country Link
EP (1) EP2145772A3 (en)
JP (1) JP5296434B2 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112993277A (en) * 2019-12-17 2021-06-18 上海神力科技有限公司 Baffle for graphite electrode and dipping device comprising same

Citations (190)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US339049A (en) 1886-03-30 Sole-edge-burnishing
US410201A (en) 1889-09-03 Bent for suspension-bridges
GB434875A (en) 1933-02-08 1935-09-05 Bela Gasper An improved method of producing multi-colour photographic images on coloured and differently sensitized multi-layer photographic material
US2714066A (en) 1950-12-06 1955-07-26 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Planographic printing plate
US2800458A (en) 1953-06-30 1957-07-23 Ncr Co Oil-containing microscopic capsules and method of making them
US2800457A (en) 1953-06-30 1957-07-23 Ncr Co Oil-containing microscopic capsules and method of making them
US2833827A (en) 1955-01-17 1958-05-06 Bayer Ag Tri (3, 5-di lower alkyl-4-hydroxy phenyl)-sulfonium chlorides and method of preparing same
US2946638A (en) 1959-03-31 1960-07-26 Acme Visible Records Inc Slidable shelf arrangement
DE1134093B (en) 1960-08-05 1962-08-02 Kalle Ag Planographic printing plate
US3111407A (en) 1960-02-26 1963-11-19 Ibm Methods for making record materials
US3181461A (en) 1963-05-23 1965-05-04 Howard A Fromson Photographic plate
US3201247A (en) 1960-05-06 1965-08-17 Litho Chemical & Supply Co Inc Surface treated lithographic plates and production thereof
US3287154A (en) 1963-04-24 1966-11-22 Polaroid Corp Pressure responsive record materials
US3307951A (en) 1963-02-01 1967-03-07 Lithoplate Inc Lithographic plate
GB1108559A (en) 1964-02-27 1968-04-03 Eastman Kodak Co Lithographic printing plate
US3418250A (en) 1965-10-23 1968-12-24 Us Plywood Champ Papers Inc Microcapsules, process for their formation and transfer sheet record material coated therewith
US3456311A (en) 1965-12-07 1969-07-22 Philips Corp Method and apparatus for adjusting interelectrode spacing in a cathode-ray tube
US3458311A (en) 1966-06-27 1969-07-29 Du Pont Photopolymerizable elements with solvent removable protective layers
US3479185A (en) 1965-06-03 1969-11-18 Du Pont Photopolymerizable compositions and layers containing 2,4,5-triphenylimidazoyl dimers
GB1230447A (en) 1967-12-04 1971-05-05
JPS4643946B1 (en) 1967-11-09 1971-12-27
US3660304A (en) 1968-06-04 1972-05-02 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Method of producing oily liquid-containing microcapsules
JPS4836281A (en) 1971-09-03 1973-05-28
JPS4864183A (en) 1971-12-09 1973-09-05
JPS4841708B1 (en) 1970-01-13 1973-12-07
US3796669A (en) 1970-04-28 1974-03-12 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Process for the production of oily liquid-containing microcapsules and the microcapsules produced thereby
JPS4970702A (en) 1972-09-27 1974-07-09
JPS4943191B1 (en) 1969-07-11 1974-11-19
US3860426A (en) 1972-12-22 1975-01-14 Eastman Kodak Co Subbed lithographic printing plate
US3881924A (en) 1971-08-25 1975-05-06 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Organic photoconductive layer sensitized with trimethine compound
US3905815A (en) 1971-12-17 1975-09-16 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Photopolymerizable sheet material with diazo resin layer
US3914511A (en) 1973-10-18 1975-10-21 Champion Int Corp Spot printing of color-forming microcapsules and co-reactant therefor
JPS5040047B2 (en) 1971-09-06 1975-12-22
JPS519079B1 (en) 1967-11-29 1976-03-23
JPS5137193A (en) 1974-09-25 1976-03-29 Toyo Boseki
JPS5147334B1 (en) 1970-11-02 1976-12-14
US4001140A (en) 1974-07-10 1977-01-04 Ncr Corporation Capsule manufacture
US4025445A (en) 1975-12-15 1977-05-24 Texaco Inc. Boron amide lubricating oil additive
JPS5230490B2 (en) 1972-03-21 1977-08-09
US4069056A (en) 1974-05-02 1978-01-17 General Electric Company Photopolymerizable composition containing group Va aromatic onium salts
US4069055A (en) 1974-05-02 1978-01-17 General Electric Company Photocurable epoxy compositions containing group Va onium salts
DE2904626A1 (en) 1978-02-08 1979-08-09 Minnesota Mining & Mfg TRIARYLSULFONIUM COMPLEX SALTS, METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF AND PHOTOPOLYMERIZABLE MIXTURES CONTAINING THESE SALTS
JPS5532070A (en) 1978-08-29 1980-03-06 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive resin composition
JPS5574898A (en) 1978-12-04 1980-06-05 British Aluminum Co Ltd Za Method of making flat printing plate
JPS5549729B2 (en) 1973-02-07 1980-12-13
JPS5617654B2 (en) 1970-12-28 1981-04-23
US4283475A (en) 1979-08-21 1981-08-11 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Pentamethine thiopyrylium salts, process for production thereof, and photoconductive compositions containing said salts
US4311783A (en) 1979-08-14 1982-01-19 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Dimers derived from unsymmetrical 2,4,5,-triphenylimidazole compounds as photoinitiators
US4327169A (en) 1981-01-19 1982-04-27 Eastman Kodak Company Infrared sensitive photoconductive composition, elements and imaging method using trimethine thiopyrylium dye
JPS5744760B2 (en) 1972-07-13 1982-09-22
JPS57196231A (en) 1981-05-20 1982-12-02 Hoechst Ag Mixture able to be polymerized by radiation and copying material mainly composed thereof
JPS5816893A (en) 1981-07-06 1983-01-31 ヘキスト・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Supporter for offset printing cylinder and its manufacture
JPS5818291A (en) 1981-07-06 1983-02-02 ヘキスト・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Supporter for offset printing plate and its manufacture
JPS58112792A (en) 1981-12-28 1983-07-05 Ricoh Co Ltd Optical information recording medium
JPS58112793A (en) 1981-12-28 1983-07-05 Ricoh Co Ltd Optical information recording medium
JPS58125246A (en) 1982-01-22 1983-07-26 Ricoh Co Ltd Laser recording medium
JPS58173696A (en) 1982-04-06 1983-10-12 Canon Inc Optical recording medium
JPS58181051A (en) 1982-04-19 1983-10-22 Canon Inc Organic photoconductor
JPS58181690A (en) 1982-04-19 1983-10-24 Canon Inc Optical recording medium
JPS5849860B2 (en) 1973-12-07 1983-11-07 ヘキスト アクチェンゲゼルシャフト Kouji Yugosei Fuchsia Yazairiyo
JPS58194595A (en) 1982-05-10 1983-11-12 Canon Inc Optical recording medium
JPS58220143A (en) 1982-06-16 1983-12-21 Canon Inc Organic film
JPS58224793A (en) 1982-06-25 1983-12-27 Nec Corp Optical recording medium
JPS595241A (en) 1982-06-21 1984-01-12 ヘキスト・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Radiation polymerizable mixture
JPS595240A (en) 1982-06-21 1984-01-12 ヘキスト・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Radiation polymerizable mixture
JPS5941363A (en) 1982-08-31 1984-03-07 Canon Inc Pyrylium dye, thiopyrylium dye and its preparation
JPS5948187A (en) 1982-09-10 1984-03-19 Nec Corp Photo recording medium
JPS5973996A (en) 1982-10-22 1984-04-26 Nec Corp Optical recording medium
JPS5984249A (en) 1982-11-05 1984-05-15 Canon Inc Organic coat
JPS5984248A (en) 1982-11-05 1984-05-15 Canon Inc Organic coat
JPS5984356A (en) 1982-11-05 1984-05-16 Ricoh Co Ltd Manufacture of optical disk master
JPS59101651A (en) 1982-12-02 1984-06-12 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive lithographic printing plate
JPS59146061A (en) 1983-02-09 1984-08-21 Canon Inc Organic film
JPS59146063A (en) 1983-02-09 1984-08-21 Canon Inc Organic film
JPS59152396A (en) 1983-02-11 1984-08-31 チバ−ガイギ− アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Metallocene, manufacture and photopolymerizable composition containing same
JPS59216146A (en) 1983-05-24 1984-12-06 Sony Corp Electrophotographic sensitive material
JPS6052940A (en) 1983-09-02 1985-03-26 Nec Corp Optical recording medium
JPS6064352A (en) 1983-09-19 1985-04-12 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Manufacture of negative type photosensitive lithographic plate
JPS6063744A (en) 1983-08-23 1985-04-12 Nec Corp Optical information recording medium
JPS6078787A (en) 1983-10-07 1985-05-04 Ricoh Co Ltd Optical information recording medium
JPS60149491A (en) 1984-01-17 1985-08-06 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Supporting body for lithographic plate
JPS60168144A (en) 1984-02-13 1985-08-31 Japan Synthetic Rubber Co Ltd Peeling soluting composition
JPS60239736A (en) 1984-05-14 1985-11-28 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition
JPS6119115A (en) 1984-07-05 1986-01-28 マルコン電子株式会社 Method of etching electrode foil for electrolytic condenser
JPS6122048A (en) 1984-06-08 1986-01-30 ヘキスト・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Polymerizable compound, manufacture and radiation sensitive copying layer
JPS61151197A (en) 1984-12-20 1986-07-09 チバ‐ガイギー アーゲー Titanocenes and radiation-curable composition containing same
JPS61162351A (en) 1985-01-11 1986-07-23 Kobe Steel Ltd Manufacture of grain on lithographic printing plate
JPS61166544A (en) 1985-01-18 1986-07-28 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosolubilizable composition
JPS61169837A (en) 1985-01-22 1986-07-31 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosolubilizable composition
JPS61169835A (en) 1985-01-22 1986-07-31 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosolubilizable composition
EP0104143B1 (en) 1982-09-18 1986-10-29 Ciba-Geigy Ag Photopolymerizable compositions containing diaryliodosyl salts
US4622286A (en) 1985-09-16 1986-11-11 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Photoimaging composition containing admixture of leuco dye and 2,4,5-triphenylimidazolyl dimer
JPS6219494A (en) 1985-07-18 1987-01-28 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Base material for lithographic printing
JPS6233692A (en) 1985-08-06 1987-02-13 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Substrate for lithography
JPS6258241A (en) 1985-09-09 1987-03-13 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition
JPS6297892A (en) 1985-10-25 1987-05-07 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Base for planographic plate
JPS62143044A (en) 1985-11-20 1987-06-26 サイカラー・インコーポレーテッド Photosetting composition containing dye borate complex and photosensitive material using the same
JPS62150242A (en) 1985-11-20 1987-07-04 サイカラー・インコーポレーテッド Photosensitive material containing ion dye compound as initiator
JPS62170950A (en) 1986-01-23 1987-07-28 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition
DE3604581A1 (en) 1986-02-14 1987-08-20 Basf Ag 4-Acylbenzylsulphonium salts, their preparation, and photocurable mixtures and recording materials containing these compounds
DE3604580A1 (en) 1986-02-14 1987-08-20 Basf Ag CURABLE MIXTURES CONTAINING N-SULFONYLAMINOSULFONIUM SALTS AS CATIONICALLY EFFECTIVE CATALYSTS
JPS6239417B2 (en) 1978-05-20 1987-08-22 Hoechst Ag
JPS6239418B2 (en) 1978-05-20 1987-08-22 Hoechst Ag
JPS62212401A (en) 1986-03-14 1987-09-18 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photopolymerizable composition
JPS62226143A (en) 1986-03-27 1987-10-05 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition
JPS62293247A (en) 1986-06-12 1987-12-19 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive printing plate
JPS6341484A (en) 1986-08-01 1988-02-22 チバ−ガイギ− ア−ゲ− Titanocene, its production and composition containing the same
JPS6356498A (en) 1986-08-27 1988-03-11 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Base for planographic plate
JPS6370243A (en) 1986-09-11 1988-03-30 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition
JPS63104889A (en) 1986-10-17 1988-05-10 ヘキスト・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Manufacture of grinding support material of aluminum or aluminum alloy used for lithographic plate
JPS63130391A (en) 1986-11-20 1988-06-02 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Base for planographic plate
JPS63145092A (en) 1986-12-10 1988-06-17 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Supporting material for lithographic printing plate
JPS63165183A (en) 1986-12-26 1988-07-08 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Support for planographic printing plate
US4756993A (en) 1986-01-27 1988-07-12 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Electrophotographic photoreceptor with light scattering layer or light absorbing layer on support backside
US4760013A (en) 1987-02-17 1988-07-26 International Business Machines Corporation Sulfonium salt photoinitiators
JPS63260909A (en) 1987-03-28 1988-10-27 ヘキスト・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Photopolymerizable mixture and recording material produced therefrom
JPS63277653A (en) 1987-03-28 1988-11-15 ヘキスト・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Polymerizable compound, radiation polymerizable mixture and radiation polymerizable recording material
JPS63298339A (en) 1987-05-29 1988-12-06 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition
JPH01105238A (en) 1987-03-28 1989-04-21 Hoechst Ag Photopolymerizable mixture and photopolymerizable material
JPH01141094A (en) 1987-11-27 1989-06-02 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Production of aluminum base for printing plate
JPH01152109A (en) 1987-12-09 1989-06-14 Toray Ind Inc Photopolymerizable composition
JPH01165613A (en) 1987-11-16 1989-06-29 Hoechst Ag Polymerizable compound, radiation polymerizable mixture thereof and radiation polymerized recording material
JPH0140337B2 (en) 1979-12-29 1989-08-28 Hoechst Ag
JPH0140336B2 (en) 1979-12-29 1989-08-28 Hoechst Ag
JPH01304453A (en) 1988-06-02 1989-12-08 Toyobo Co Ltd Photopolymerizable composition
JPH01307745A (en) 1988-06-07 1989-12-12 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive recording material
JPH01316290A (en) 1988-06-15 1989-12-21 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Aluminum base material for lithographic printing plate and its manufacture
JPH02249A (en) 1987-12-01 1990-01-05 Ciba Geigy Ag Titanocene and photopolymerizable composition containing it
JPH024705A (en) 1988-03-24 1990-01-09 Dentsply Internatl Inc Titanate initiator for a photosetting composition
JPH0225493A (en) 1988-05-21 1990-01-26 Hoechst Ag Alkenylphosphonic ester and alkenylphoshinic ester, production thereof, radiation polymerizable mixture containing the same and recording material
JPH0216765B2 (en) 1980-09-29 1990-04-18 Hoechst Ag
JPH02150848A (en) 1988-12-02 1990-06-11 Hitachi Ltd Photofadable and radiation sensitive composition and pattern forming method by using this composition
US4933377A (en) 1988-02-29 1990-06-12 Saeva Franklin D Novel sulfonium salts and the use thereof as photoinitiators
JPH0232293B2 (en) 1980-12-22 1990-07-19 Hoechst Ag
JPH02226149A (en) 1988-12-22 1990-09-07 Hoechst Ag Photopolymerizing compound, photopolymerizing mixture containing the same and photopolymerizing copying material manufactured therefrom
JPH02296514A (en) 1989-05-12 1990-12-07 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Suspension controller for vehicle
EP0297442B1 (en) 1987-07-01 1991-02-27 BASF Aktiengesellschaft Sulfonium salts comprising groups which are labile in acid environment
JPH03215095A (en) 1989-10-19 1991-09-20 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive planographic printing plate
JPH0369163B2 (en) 1984-06-06 1991-10-31 Idemitsu Kosan Co
JPH03261592A (en) 1990-03-09 1991-11-21 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive planographic printing plate
JPH04282637A (en) 1991-03-12 1992-10-07 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive planographic printing plate
JPH04365049A (en) 1991-06-12 1992-12-17 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition material
JPH0513514B2 (en) 1985-09-10 1993-02-22 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd
JPH0519702B2 (en) 1985-09-05 1993-03-17 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd
JPH0568204A (en) 1991-09-06 1993-03-19 Canon Inc Electronic still camera
JPH0583588A (en) 1991-09-24 1993-04-02 Omron Corp Image processor
JPH05195300A (en) 1992-01-23 1993-08-03 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Electrolytic treating device
JPH05246171A (en) 1991-01-31 1993-09-24 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive planographic printing plate
JPH0621050A (en) 1991-04-23 1994-01-28 Sony Corp Manufacture of semiconductor device
EP0370693B1 (en) 1988-11-21 1994-04-06 Eastman Kodak Company Novel onium salts and the use thereof as photoinitiators
JPH0629285B2 (en) 1983-10-14 1994-04-20 三菱化成株式会社 Photopolymerizable composition
JPH06135175A (en) 1992-10-28 1994-05-17 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Manufacture of aluminum base material for lithographic printing plate
JPH06157623A (en) 1992-08-14 1994-06-07 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Polymerizable composition and method for polymerization
EP0297443B1 (en) 1987-07-01 1994-06-08 BASF Aktiengesellschaft Light sensitive mixture for light sensitive coating materials
JPH06175564A (en) 1992-12-04 1994-06-24 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Hologram recording material and production of volume phase type hologram by using the recording material
JPH06175561A (en) 1992-12-04 1994-06-24 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Hologram recording medium and production of volume phase type hologram by using the recording medium
JPH06175554A (en) 1992-12-03 1994-06-24 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Production of volume phase type hologram
JPH06175553A (en) 1992-12-03 1994-06-24 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Hologram recording medium and production of volume phase type hologram by using this medium
JPH06205657A (en) 1992-10-26 1994-07-26 Mcneil Ppc Inc Stabilized sorbic acid or its salt
JPH06348011A (en) 1993-06-04 1994-12-22 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Photopolymerizable composition
JPH0721633B2 (en) 1987-07-10 1995-03-08 富士写真フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive material
JPH0781260A (en) 1993-09-13 1995-03-28 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Manufacture of substrate for lithographic printing block
JPH07128785A (en) 1993-11-02 1995-05-19 Konica Corp Material and method for forming image
JPH07140589A (en) 1993-11-19 1995-06-02 Konica Corp Image forming material and image forming method
JPH07292014A (en) 1994-04-25 1995-11-07 Nippon Paint Co Ltd Near-infrared-polymerizable composition
JPH07306527A (en) 1994-05-11 1995-11-21 Konica Corp Image forming material and image forming method
JPH08108621A (en) 1994-10-06 1996-04-30 Konica Corp Image recording medium and image forming method using the medium
JPH08209313A (en) 1994-11-16 1996-08-13 Furukawa Electric Co Ltd:The Production of aluminum alloy substrate for planographic printing plate
WO1996034316A1 (en) 1995-04-27 1996-10-31 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Negative-acting no-process printing plates
JPH09188686A (en) 1995-11-24 1997-07-22 Ciba Geigy Ag Borate salt for photo polymerization initiator stable in acidic medium
JPH09188710A (en) 1995-11-24 1997-07-22 Ciba Geigy Ag Borate photoinitiator derived from monoborane
JPH09188685A (en) 1995-11-24 1997-07-22 Ciba Geigy Ag Borate auxiliary initiator for photo polymerization
JP2764769B2 (en) 1991-06-24 1998-06-11 富士写真フイルム株式会社 Photopolymerizable composition
JPH1138633A (en) 1997-07-22 1999-02-12 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Negative type image recording material
JP2938397B2 (en) 1995-10-24 1999-08-23 アグフア−ゲヴエルト・ナームローゼ・フエンノートシヤツプ Method for producing a lithographic printing plate including on-press development
JP2000066385A (en) 1998-08-18 2000-03-03 Ciba Specialty Chem Holding Inc SULFONYL OXIMES FOR HIGH SENSITIVITY THICK i-LINE PHOTORESIST
JP2000080068A (en) 1998-06-26 2000-03-21 Ciba Specialty Chem Holding Inc New o-acyloxime photopolymerization initiator
JP2000131837A (en) 1998-08-17 2000-05-12 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Photopolymerizable composition, photopolymerizable planographic printing plate and image forming method
JP2001133969A (en) 1999-11-01 2001-05-18 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Negative type original plate of planographic printing plate
JP2001277742A (en) 2000-01-27 2001-10-10 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Original plate for lithographic printing plate
JP2001277740A (en) 2000-01-27 2001-10-10 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Original plate for lithographic printing plate
JP2001293971A (en) 2000-04-14 2001-10-23 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Original plate for lithographic printing plate
JP2001343742A (en) 2000-05-30 2001-12-14 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Thermosensitive composition, and original plate of planographic printing plate using the same
JP2002107916A (en) 2000-09-27 2002-04-10 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Original plate for planographic printing plate
JP2002116539A (en) 2000-10-11 2002-04-19 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Original plate of planographic printing plate
JP2002148790A (en) 2000-09-04 2002-05-22 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Heat sensitive composition, lithographic printing master plate which uses the same and sulfonium salt compound
JP2002278057A (en) 2001-01-15 2002-09-27 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Negative type image recording material and cyanine dye
JP2002287334A (en) 2001-03-26 2002-10-03 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Original plate of planographic printing plate and planographic prirting method
JP2003328465A (en) 2002-05-08 2003-11-19 Isao Okawa Building
JP3819574B2 (en) 1997-12-25 2006-09-13 三洋電機株式会社 Manufacturing method of semiconductor device

Family Cites Families (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002301879A (en) * 2001-02-01 2002-10-15 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Substrate for lithographic printing plate and manufacturing method thereof
JP2003048379A (en) * 2001-05-30 2003-02-18 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Support for lithographic printing plate and original plate for lithographic printing plate
JP2004074615A (en) * 2002-08-20 2004-03-11 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Support for lithographic printing plate and original plate for lithographic printing plate using the support
JP4410714B2 (en) * 2004-08-13 2010-02-03 富士フイルム株式会社 Method for producing support for lithographic printing plate
DE602006001142D1 (en) * 2005-04-13 2008-06-26 Fujifilm Corp Method for producing a planographic printing plate support
JP4675719B2 (en) * 2005-08-29 2011-04-27 富士フイルム株式会社 Planographic printing method and planographic printing plate precursor
JP2007083256A (en) * 2005-09-20 2007-04-05 Fujifilm Corp Method for producing supporter for lithographic version
JP2008012718A (en) * 2006-07-04 2008-01-24 Fujifilm Corp Manufacturing method of substrate for lithographic printing plate
JP2008043958A (en) * 2006-08-11 2008-02-28 Fujifilm Corp Aluminum continuous casting and rolling apparatus, and manufacturing method of aluminum alloy plate for lithographic form plate supporting body
JP2008080541A (en) * 2006-09-26 2008-04-10 Fujifilm Corp Original printing plate for lithographic printing plate, lithographic printing method, and new cyanine dye
JP2009208140A (en) * 2008-03-06 2009-09-17 Fujifilm Corp Manufacturing method of aluminum alloy sheet for planographic printing plate, aluminum alloy sheet for planographic printing plate and support for planographic printing plate manufactured by the method

Patent Citations (196)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US410201A (en) 1889-09-03 Bent for suspension-bridges
US339049A (en) 1886-03-30 Sole-edge-burnishing
GB434875A (en) 1933-02-08 1935-09-05 Bela Gasper An improved method of producing multi-colour photographic images on coloured and differently sensitized multi-layer photographic material
US2714066A (en) 1950-12-06 1955-07-26 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Planographic printing plate
DE1091433B (en) 1950-12-06 1960-10-20 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Presensitized planographic printing plate
US2800458A (en) 1953-06-30 1957-07-23 Ncr Co Oil-containing microscopic capsules and method of making them
US2800457A (en) 1953-06-30 1957-07-23 Ncr Co Oil-containing microscopic capsules and method of making them
US2833827A (en) 1955-01-17 1958-05-06 Bayer Ag Tri (3, 5-di lower alkyl-4-hydroxy phenyl)-sulfonium chlorides and method of preparing same
US2946638A (en) 1959-03-31 1960-07-26 Acme Visible Records Inc Slidable shelf arrangement
US3111407A (en) 1960-02-26 1963-11-19 Ibm Methods for making record materials
US3201247A (en) 1960-05-06 1965-08-17 Litho Chemical & Supply Co Inc Surface treated lithographic plates and production thereof
DE1134093B (en) 1960-08-05 1962-08-02 Kalle Ag Planographic printing plate
US3307951A (en) 1963-02-01 1967-03-07 Lithoplate Inc Lithographic plate
US3287154A (en) 1963-04-24 1966-11-22 Polaroid Corp Pressure responsive record materials
US3181461A (en) 1963-05-23 1965-05-04 Howard A Fromson Photographic plate
GB1108559A (en) 1964-02-27 1968-04-03 Eastman Kodak Co Lithographic printing plate
US3479185A (en) 1965-06-03 1969-11-18 Du Pont Photopolymerizable compositions and layers containing 2,4,5-triphenylimidazoyl dimers
US3418250A (en) 1965-10-23 1968-12-24 Us Plywood Champ Papers Inc Microcapsules, process for their formation and transfer sheet record material coated therewith
US3456311A (en) 1965-12-07 1969-07-22 Philips Corp Method and apparatus for adjusting interelectrode spacing in a cathode-ray tube
US3458311A (en) 1966-06-27 1969-07-29 Du Pont Photopolymerizable elements with solvent removable protective layers
JPS4643946B1 (en) 1967-11-09 1971-12-27
JPS519079B1 (en) 1967-11-29 1976-03-23
GB1230447A (en) 1967-12-04 1971-05-05
US3660304A (en) 1968-06-04 1972-05-02 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Method of producing oily liquid-containing microcapsules
JPS4943191B1 (en) 1969-07-11 1974-11-19
JPS4841708B1 (en) 1970-01-13 1973-12-07
US3796669A (en) 1970-04-28 1974-03-12 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Process for the production of oily liquid-containing microcapsules and the microcapsules produced thereby
JPS5147334B1 (en) 1970-11-02 1976-12-14
JPS5617654B2 (en) 1970-12-28 1981-04-23
US3881924A (en) 1971-08-25 1975-05-06 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Organic photoconductive layer sensitized with trimethine compound
JPS4836281A (en) 1971-09-03 1973-05-28
JPS5040047B2 (en) 1971-09-06 1975-12-22
JPS4864183A (en) 1971-12-09 1973-09-05
US3905815A (en) 1971-12-17 1975-09-16 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Photopolymerizable sheet material with diazo resin layer
JPS5230490B2 (en) 1972-03-21 1977-08-09
JPS5744760B2 (en) 1972-07-13 1982-09-22
JPS4970702A (en) 1972-09-27 1974-07-09
US3860426A (en) 1972-12-22 1975-01-14 Eastman Kodak Co Subbed lithographic printing plate
JPS5549729B2 (en) 1973-02-07 1980-12-13
US3914511A (en) 1973-10-18 1975-10-21 Champion Int Corp Spot printing of color-forming microcapsules and co-reactant therefor
JPS5849860B2 (en) 1973-12-07 1983-11-07 ヘキスト アクチェンゲゼルシャフト Kouji Yugosei Fuchsia Yazairiyo
US4069056A (en) 1974-05-02 1978-01-17 General Electric Company Photopolymerizable composition containing group Va aromatic onium salts
US4069055A (en) 1974-05-02 1978-01-17 General Electric Company Photocurable epoxy compositions containing group Va onium salts
US4087376A (en) 1974-07-10 1978-05-02 Ncr Corporation Capsule manufacture
US4089802A (en) 1974-07-10 1978-05-16 Ncr Corporation Capsule manufacture
US4001140A (en) 1974-07-10 1977-01-04 Ncr Corporation Capsule manufacture
JPS5137193A (en) 1974-09-25 1976-03-29 Toyo Boseki
US4025445A (en) 1975-12-15 1977-05-24 Texaco Inc. Boron amide lubricating oil additive
DE2904626A1 (en) 1978-02-08 1979-08-09 Minnesota Mining & Mfg TRIARYLSULFONIUM COMPLEX SALTS, METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF AND PHOTOPOLYMERIZABLE MIXTURES CONTAINING THESE SALTS
JPS6239418B2 (en) 1978-05-20 1987-08-22 Hoechst Ag
JPS6239417B2 (en) 1978-05-20 1987-08-22 Hoechst Ag
JPS5532070A (en) 1978-08-29 1980-03-06 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive resin composition
JPS5574898A (en) 1978-12-04 1980-06-05 British Aluminum Co Ltd Za Method of making flat printing plate
US4311783A (en) 1979-08-14 1982-01-19 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Dimers derived from unsymmetrical 2,4,5,-triphenylimidazole compounds as photoinitiators
US4283475A (en) 1979-08-21 1981-08-11 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Pentamethine thiopyrylium salts, process for production thereof, and photoconductive compositions containing said salts
JPH0140337B2 (en) 1979-12-29 1989-08-28 Hoechst Ag
JPH0140336B2 (en) 1979-12-29 1989-08-28 Hoechst Ag
JPH0216765B2 (en) 1980-09-29 1990-04-18 Hoechst Ag
JPH0232293B2 (en) 1980-12-22 1990-07-19 Hoechst Ag
US4327169A (en) 1981-01-19 1982-04-27 Eastman Kodak Company Infrared sensitive photoconductive composition, elements and imaging method using trimethine thiopyrylium dye
JPS57142645A (en) 1981-01-19 1982-09-03 Eastman Kodak Co Infrared sensitive photoconductive element
JPS57196231A (en) 1981-05-20 1982-12-02 Hoechst Ag Mixture able to be polymerized by radiation and copying material mainly composed thereof
JPS5816893A (en) 1981-07-06 1983-01-31 ヘキスト・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Supporter for offset printing cylinder and its manufacture
JPS5818291A (en) 1981-07-06 1983-02-02 ヘキスト・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Supporter for offset printing plate and its manufacture
JPS58112793A (en) 1981-12-28 1983-07-05 Ricoh Co Ltd Optical information recording medium
JPS58112792A (en) 1981-12-28 1983-07-05 Ricoh Co Ltd Optical information recording medium
JPS58125246A (en) 1982-01-22 1983-07-26 Ricoh Co Ltd Laser recording medium
JPS58173696A (en) 1982-04-06 1983-10-12 Canon Inc Optical recording medium
JPS58181051A (en) 1982-04-19 1983-10-22 Canon Inc Organic photoconductor
JPS58181690A (en) 1982-04-19 1983-10-24 Canon Inc Optical recording medium
JPS58194595A (en) 1982-05-10 1983-11-12 Canon Inc Optical recording medium
JPS58220143A (en) 1982-06-16 1983-12-21 Canon Inc Organic film
JPS595240A (en) 1982-06-21 1984-01-12 ヘキスト・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Radiation polymerizable mixture
JPS595241A (en) 1982-06-21 1984-01-12 ヘキスト・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Radiation polymerizable mixture
JPS58224793A (en) 1982-06-25 1983-12-27 Nec Corp Optical recording medium
JPS5941363A (en) 1982-08-31 1984-03-07 Canon Inc Pyrylium dye, thiopyrylium dye and its preparation
JPS5948187A (en) 1982-09-10 1984-03-19 Nec Corp Photo recording medium
EP0104143B1 (en) 1982-09-18 1986-10-29 Ciba-Geigy Ag Photopolymerizable compositions containing diaryliodosyl salts
JPS5973996A (en) 1982-10-22 1984-04-26 Nec Corp Optical recording medium
JPS5984249A (en) 1982-11-05 1984-05-15 Canon Inc Organic coat
JPS5984356A (en) 1982-11-05 1984-05-16 Ricoh Co Ltd Manufacture of optical disk master
JPS5984248A (en) 1982-11-05 1984-05-15 Canon Inc Organic coat
JPS59101651A (en) 1982-12-02 1984-06-12 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive lithographic printing plate
JPS59146063A (en) 1983-02-09 1984-08-21 Canon Inc Organic film
JPS59146061A (en) 1983-02-09 1984-08-21 Canon Inc Organic film
JPS59152396A (en) 1983-02-11 1984-08-31 チバ−ガイギ− アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Metallocene, manufacture and photopolymerizable composition containing same
JPS59216146A (en) 1983-05-24 1984-12-06 Sony Corp Electrophotographic sensitive material
JPS6063744A (en) 1983-08-23 1985-04-12 Nec Corp Optical information recording medium
JPS6052940A (en) 1983-09-02 1985-03-26 Nec Corp Optical recording medium
JPS6064352A (en) 1983-09-19 1985-04-12 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Manufacture of negative type photosensitive lithographic plate
JPS6078787A (en) 1983-10-07 1985-05-04 Ricoh Co Ltd Optical information recording medium
JPH0629285B2 (en) 1983-10-14 1994-04-20 三菱化成株式会社 Photopolymerizable composition
JPS60149491A (en) 1984-01-17 1985-08-06 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Supporting body for lithographic plate
JPS60168144A (en) 1984-02-13 1985-08-31 Japan Synthetic Rubber Co Ltd Peeling soluting composition
JPS60239736A (en) 1984-05-14 1985-11-28 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition
JPH0369163B2 (en) 1984-06-06 1991-10-31 Idemitsu Kosan Co
JPS6122048A (en) 1984-06-08 1986-01-30 ヘキスト・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Polymerizable compound, manufacture and radiation sensitive copying layer
JPS6119115A (en) 1984-07-05 1986-01-28 マルコン電子株式会社 Method of etching electrode foil for electrolytic condenser
JPS61151197A (en) 1984-12-20 1986-07-09 チバ‐ガイギー アーゲー Titanocenes and radiation-curable composition containing same
JPS61162351A (en) 1985-01-11 1986-07-23 Kobe Steel Ltd Manufacture of grain on lithographic printing plate
JPS61166544A (en) 1985-01-18 1986-07-28 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosolubilizable composition
JPS61169837A (en) 1985-01-22 1986-07-31 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosolubilizable composition
JPS61169835A (en) 1985-01-22 1986-07-31 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosolubilizable composition
JPS6219494A (en) 1985-07-18 1987-01-28 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Base material for lithographic printing
JPS6233692A (en) 1985-08-06 1987-02-13 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Substrate for lithography
JPH0519702B2 (en) 1985-09-05 1993-03-17 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd
JPS6258241A (en) 1985-09-09 1987-03-13 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition
JPH0513514B2 (en) 1985-09-10 1993-02-22 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd
US4622286A (en) 1985-09-16 1986-11-11 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Photoimaging composition containing admixture of leuco dye and 2,4,5-triphenylimidazolyl dimer
JPS6297892A (en) 1985-10-25 1987-05-07 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Base for planographic plate
JPS62143044A (en) 1985-11-20 1987-06-26 サイカラー・インコーポレーテッド Photosetting composition containing dye borate complex and photosensitive material using the same
JPS62150242A (en) 1985-11-20 1987-07-04 サイカラー・インコーポレーテッド Photosensitive material containing ion dye compound as initiator
JPS62170950A (en) 1986-01-23 1987-07-28 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition
US4756993A (en) 1986-01-27 1988-07-12 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Electrophotographic photoreceptor with light scattering layer or light absorbing layer on support backside
US4734444A (en) 1986-02-14 1988-03-29 Basf Aktiengesellschaft Curable mixtures containing N-sulfonylaminosulfonium salts as cationically active catalysts
DE3604580A1 (en) 1986-02-14 1987-08-20 Basf Ag CURABLE MIXTURES CONTAINING N-SULFONYLAMINOSULFONIUM SALTS AS CATIONICALLY EFFECTIVE CATALYSTS
EP0233567B1 (en) 1986-02-14 1992-05-27 BASF Aktiengesellschaft Curable compositions containing n-sulfonylaminosulfonium salts as cationically active catalysts
DE3604581A1 (en) 1986-02-14 1987-08-20 Basf Ag 4-Acylbenzylsulphonium salts, their preparation, and photocurable mixtures and recording materials containing these compounds
JPS62212401A (en) 1986-03-14 1987-09-18 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photopolymerizable composition
JPS62226143A (en) 1986-03-27 1987-10-05 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition
JPS62293247A (en) 1986-06-12 1987-12-19 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive printing plate
JPS6341484A (en) 1986-08-01 1988-02-22 チバ−ガイギ− ア−ゲ− Titanocene, its production and composition containing the same
JPS6356498A (en) 1986-08-27 1988-03-11 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Base for planographic plate
JPS6370243A (en) 1986-09-11 1988-03-30 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition
JPS63104889A (en) 1986-10-17 1988-05-10 ヘキスト・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Manufacture of grinding support material of aluminum or aluminum alloy used for lithographic plate
JPS63130391A (en) 1986-11-20 1988-06-02 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Base for planographic plate
JPS63145092A (en) 1986-12-10 1988-06-17 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Supporting material for lithographic printing plate
JPS63165183A (en) 1986-12-26 1988-07-08 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Support for planographic printing plate
US4760013A (en) 1987-02-17 1988-07-26 International Business Machines Corporation Sulfonium salt photoinitiators
JPS63260909A (en) 1987-03-28 1988-10-27 ヘキスト・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Photopolymerizable mixture and recording material produced therefrom
JPH01105238A (en) 1987-03-28 1989-04-21 Hoechst Ag Photopolymerizable mixture and photopolymerizable material
JPS63277653A (en) 1987-03-28 1988-11-15 ヘキスト・アクチエンゲゼルシヤフト Polymerizable compound, radiation polymerizable mixture and radiation polymerizable recording material
JPS63298339A (en) 1987-05-29 1988-12-06 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition
EP0297443B1 (en) 1987-07-01 1994-06-08 BASF Aktiengesellschaft Light sensitive mixture for light sensitive coating materials
EP0297442B1 (en) 1987-07-01 1991-02-27 BASF Aktiengesellschaft Sulfonium salts comprising groups which are labile in acid environment
JPH0721633B2 (en) 1987-07-10 1995-03-08 富士写真フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive material
JPH01165613A (en) 1987-11-16 1989-06-29 Hoechst Ag Polymerizable compound, radiation polymerizable mixture thereof and radiation polymerized recording material
JPH01141094A (en) 1987-11-27 1989-06-02 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Production of aluminum base for printing plate
JPH02249A (en) 1987-12-01 1990-01-05 Ciba Geigy Ag Titanocene and photopolymerizable composition containing it
JPH01152109A (en) 1987-12-09 1989-06-14 Toray Ind Inc Photopolymerizable composition
US4933377A (en) 1988-02-29 1990-06-12 Saeva Franklin D Novel sulfonium salts and the use thereof as photoinitiators
JPH024705A (en) 1988-03-24 1990-01-09 Dentsply Internatl Inc Titanate initiator for a photosetting composition
JPH0225493A (en) 1988-05-21 1990-01-26 Hoechst Ag Alkenylphosphonic ester and alkenylphoshinic ester, production thereof, radiation polymerizable mixture containing the same and recording material
JPH01304453A (en) 1988-06-02 1989-12-08 Toyobo Co Ltd Photopolymerizable composition
JPH01307745A (en) 1988-06-07 1989-12-12 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive recording material
JPH01316290A (en) 1988-06-15 1989-12-21 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Aluminum base material for lithographic printing plate and its manufacture
EP0370693B1 (en) 1988-11-21 1994-04-06 Eastman Kodak Company Novel onium salts and the use thereof as photoinitiators
JPH02150848A (en) 1988-12-02 1990-06-11 Hitachi Ltd Photofadable and radiation sensitive composition and pattern forming method by using this composition
JPH02226149A (en) 1988-12-22 1990-09-07 Hoechst Ag Photopolymerizing compound, photopolymerizing mixture containing the same and photopolymerizing copying material manufactured therefrom
JPH02296514A (en) 1989-05-12 1990-12-07 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Suspension controller for vehicle
JPH03215095A (en) 1989-10-19 1991-09-20 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive planographic printing plate
JPH03261592A (en) 1990-03-09 1991-11-21 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive planographic printing plate
JPH05246171A (en) 1991-01-31 1993-09-24 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive planographic printing plate
JPH04282637A (en) 1991-03-12 1992-10-07 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive planographic printing plate
JPH0621050A (en) 1991-04-23 1994-01-28 Sony Corp Manufacture of semiconductor device
JPH04365049A (en) 1991-06-12 1992-12-17 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition material
JP2764769B2 (en) 1991-06-24 1998-06-11 富士写真フイルム株式会社 Photopolymerizable composition
JPH0568204A (en) 1991-09-06 1993-03-19 Canon Inc Electronic still camera
JPH0583588A (en) 1991-09-24 1993-04-02 Omron Corp Image processor
JPH05195300A (en) 1992-01-23 1993-08-03 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Electrolytic treating device
JPH06157623A (en) 1992-08-14 1994-06-07 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Polymerizable composition and method for polymerization
JPH06205657A (en) 1992-10-26 1994-07-26 Mcneil Ppc Inc Stabilized sorbic acid or its salt
JPH06135175A (en) 1992-10-28 1994-05-17 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Manufacture of aluminum base material for lithographic printing plate
JPH06175554A (en) 1992-12-03 1994-06-24 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Production of volume phase type hologram
JPH06175553A (en) 1992-12-03 1994-06-24 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Hologram recording medium and production of volume phase type hologram by using this medium
JPH06175564A (en) 1992-12-04 1994-06-24 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Hologram recording material and production of volume phase type hologram by using the recording material
JPH06175561A (en) 1992-12-04 1994-06-24 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Hologram recording medium and production of volume phase type hologram by using the recording medium
JPH06348011A (en) 1993-06-04 1994-12-22 Toyo Ink Mfg Co Ltd Photopolymerizable composition
JPH0781260A (en) 1993-09-13 1995-03-28 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Manufacture of substrate for lithographic printing block
JPH07128785A (en) 1993-11-02 1995-05-19 Konica Corp Material and method for forming image
JPH07140589A (en) 1993-11-19 1995-06-02 Konica Corp Image forming material and image forming method
JPH07292014A (en) 1994-04-25 1995-11-07 Nippon Paint Co Ltd Near-infrared-polymerizable composition
JPH07306527A (en) 1994-05-11 1995-11-21 Konica Corp Image forming material and image forming method
JPH08108621A (en) 1994-10-06 1996-04-30 Konica Corp Image recording medium and image forming method using the medium
JPH08209313A (en) 1994-11-16 1996-08-13 Furukawa Electric Co Ltd:The Production of aluminum alloy substrate for planographic printing plate
WO1996034316A1 (en) 1995-04-27 1996-10-31 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Negative-acting no-process printing plates
JP2938397B2 (en) 1995-10-24 1999-08-23 アグフア−ゲヴエルト・ナームローゼ・フエンノートシヤツプ Method for producing a lithographic printing plate including on-press development
JPH09188685A (en) 1995-11-24 1997-07-22 Ciba Geigy Ag Borate auxiliary initiator for photo polymerization
JPH09188710A (en) 1995-11-24 1997-07-22 Ciba Geigy Ag Borate photoinitiator derived from monoborane
JPH09188686A (en) 1995-11-24 1997-07-22 Ciba Geigy Ag Borate salt for photo polymerization initiator stable in acidic medium
JPH1138633A (en) 1997-07-22 1999-02-12 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Negative type image recording material
JP3819574B2 (en) 1997-12-25 2006-09-13 三洋電機株式会社 Manufacturing method of semiconductor device
JP2000080068A (en) 1998-06-26 2000-03-21 Ciba Specialty Chem Holding Inc New o-acyloxime photopolymerization initiator
JP2000131837A (en) 1998-08-17 2000-05-12 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Photopolymerizable composition, photopolymerizable planographic printing plate and image forming method
JP2000066385A (en) 1998-08-18 2000-03-03 Ciba Specialty Chem Holding Inc SULFONYL OXIMES FOR HIGH SENSITIVITY THICK i-LINE PHOTORESIST
JP2001133969A (en) 1999-11-01 2001-05-18 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Negative type original plate of planographic printing plate
JP2001277740A (en) 2000-01-27 2001-10-10 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Original plate for lithographic printing plate
JP2001277742A (en) 2000-01-27 2001-10-10 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Original plate for lithographic printing plate
JP2001293971A (en) 2000-04-14 2001-10-23 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Original plate for lithographic printing plate
JP2001343742A (en) 2000-05-30 2001-12-14 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Thermosensitive composition, and original plate of planographic printing plate using the same
JP2002148790A (en) 2000-09-04 2002-05-22 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Heat sensitive composition, lithographic printing master plate which uses the same and sulfonium salt compound
JP2002107916A (en) 2000-09-27 2002-04-10 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Original plate for planographic printing plate
JP2002116539A (en) 2000-10-11 2002-04-19 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Original plate of planographic printing plate
JP2002278057A (en) 2001-01-15 2002-09-27 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Negative type image recording material and cyanine dye
JP2002287334A (en) 2001-03-26 2002-10-03 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Original plate of planographic printing plate and planographic prirting method
JP2003328465A (en) 2002-05-08 2003-11-19 Isao Okawa Building

Non-Patent Citations (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Insatsu Inki Gijutsu", 1984, CMC PUBLISHING CO., LTD.
"Saishin Ganryo Binran", 1977, JAPAN ASSOCIATION OF PIGMENT TECHNOLOGY
"Saishin Ganryo Oyo Gijutsu", 1986, CMC PUBLISHING CO., LTD.
"Senryo Binran", 1970, THE SOCIETY OF SYNTHETIC ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
C.S. WEN, TEH, PROC. CONF. RAD. CURING ASIA, October 1988 (1988-10-01), pages 478
J.V. CRIVELLO ET AL., J. POLYMER SCI., POLYMER CHEM. ED., vol. 17, 1979, pages 1047
J.V. CRIVELLO ET AL., MACROMOLECULES, vol. 10, no. 6, 1977, pages 1307
JCS PER KIN II, 1979, pages 1653 - 1660
JCS PERKIN II, 1979, pages 156 - 162
JOURNAL OF PHOTOPOLYMER SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY, 1995, pages 202 - 232
L.F. MONDOLFO, ALUMINUM ALLOYS; STRUCTURE AND PRCPERTIES, 1976
M.P. HUTT, JOURNAL OF HETEROCYCLIC CHEMISTRY, vol. 1, no. 3, 1970
MARTIN KUNZ, RAD TECH' 98. PROCEEDINGS, 19 April 1998 (1998-04-19)
NIPPON SETCHAKU KYOKAISHI, vol. 20, no. 7, 1984, pages 300 - 308
S.I. SCHLESINGER, PHOTOGR. SCI. ENG., vol. 18, 1974, pages 387
SAIWAI SHOBO: "Kinzoku Sekken no Seishitsu to Oyo", 1984, CMC PUBLISHING CO., LTD., article "Insatsu Inki Gijutsu"
T.S. BAL ET AL., POLYMER, vol. 21, 1980, pages 423
WAKABAYASHI ET AL., BULL. CHEM. SOC. JAPAN, vol. 42, 1969, pages 2924

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112993277A (en) * 2019-12-17 2021-06-18 上海神力科技有限公司 Baffle for graphite electrode and dipping device comprising same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP5296434B2 (en) 2013-09-25
JP2010023284A (en) 2010-02-04
EP2145772A3 (en) 2012-02-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5265955B2 (en) Plane printing plate aluminum alloy plate, planographic printing plate support, planographic printing plate precursor, and method for producing planographic printing plate aluminum alloy plate
EP1992482B1 (en) Planographic printing plate precursor and printing method using the same
EP1552923B1 (en) Lithographic printing plate precursor and lithographic printing method using the same
US8048607B2 (en) Compound having polymethine-chain structure, image forming material, planographic printing plate precursor, and image forming method using the same, method of making planographic printing plate, and planographic printing method
EP1588858B1 (en) Lithographic printing plate precursor and lithographic printing method
EP1645912B1 (en) Lithographic printing method
EP1516724B1 (en) Presensitized plate and lithographic printing method
EP2110261B1 (en) Aluminum alloy plate for lithographic printing plate, ligthographic printing plate support, presensitized plate, method of manufacturing aluminum alloy plate for lithographic printing plate and method of manufacturing lithographic printing plate support
JP5548805B2 (en) Planographic printing plate precursor and method for producing the same
EP1705007B1 (en) Lithographic printing plate precursor and lithographic printing method
EP1708033B1 (en) Method of manufacturing a lithographic printing plate
JP2008162056A (en) Original plate of lithographic printing plate and manufacturing method thereof
JP4085052B2 (en) Planographic printing plate precursor and planographic printing method
JP2010058315A (en) Method of manufacturing lithographic printing plate support, lithographic printing plate support, and original plate for lithographic printing plate
EP2105298B1 (en) Negative-working lithographic printing plate precursor and method of lithographic printing using same
EP2145772A2 (en) Method of manufacturing aluminum alloy plate for lithographic printing plate, aluminum alloy plate for lithographic printing plate, lithographic printing plate support and presensitized plate
US20090233222A1 (en) Lithographic printing plate precursor
JP2005219393A (en) On press developing method of lithographic printing form original plate
JP4469599B2 (en) Planographic printing plate precursor and planographic printing method
JP2006137100A (en) Original plate of lithographic printing plate
JP2006088384A (en) Lithographic printing form original plate
JP2005186504A (en) Lithographic printing plate original plate and lithographic printing method
JP2009233987A (en) Original plate for planographic printing plate
JP2005059283A (en) Original plate for lithographic printing plate and lithographic printing method
JP2006264302A (en) Image recording method for lithographic printing plate original plate, and lithographic printing method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PUAI Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SI SK SM TR

PUAL Search report despatched

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009013

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SI SK SM TR

RIC1 Information provided on ipc code assigned before grant

Ipc: B41C 1/10 20060101ALN20120126BHEP

Ipc: C22C 21/00 20060101ALI20120126BHEP

Ipc: B41N 3/03 20060101ALN20120126BHEP

Ipc: C22F 1/00 20060101ALI20120126BHEP

Ipc: B41N 1/08 20060101AFI20120126BHEP

Ipc: C22C 1/02 20060101ALI20120126BHEP

17P Request for examination filed

Effective date: 20120820

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: THE APPLICATION HAS BEEN WITHDRAWN

18W Application withdrawn

Effective date: 20160601